Updated userguide and welcome pages. Thanks all translators. +alpha3
git-svn-id: file:///srv/svn/repos/haiku/haiku/trunk@41971 a95241bf-73f2-0310-859d-f6bbb57e9c96
@@ -117,7 +117,7 @@ Andernfalls löscht man einfach den Ordner der Anwendung.</p>
|
||||
<tr><td style="width:24px;"><img src="../images/apps-images/mediaplayer-icon_16.png" alt="icon" width="16" height="16" /></td><td><a href="applications/mediaplayer.html">MediaPlayer</a></td><td> </td>
|
||||
<td valign="top">Ein Player für alle unterstützten Audio/Video Dateien.</td></tr>
|
||||
<tr><td style="width:24px;"><img src="../images/apps-images/midiplayer-icon_16.png" alt="icon" width="16" height="16" /></td><td><a href="applications/midiplayer.html">MidiPlayer</a></td><td> </td>
|
||||
<td valign="top"><span style="color:silver">Ein Player für MIDI Dateien. [<i>fehlt noch</i>]</span></td></tr>
|
||||
<td valign="top">Ein Player für MIDI Dateien.</td></tr>
|
||||
<tr><td style="width:24px;"><img src="../images/apps-images/packageinstaller-icon_16.png" alt="icon" width="16" height="16" /></td><td><a href="applications/packageinstaller.html">PackageInstaller</a></td><td> </td>
|
||||
<td valign="top"><span style="color:silver">Ein Tool zum Installieren von BeOS Paketen im PKG Format. [<i>fehlt noch</i>]</span></td></tr>
|
||||
<tr><td style="width:24px;"><img src="../images/apps-images/people-icon_16.png" alt="icon" width="16" height="16" /></td><td><a href="applications/people.html">People</a></td><td> </td>
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -4,7 +4,7 @@
|
||||
<head>
|
||||
<!--
|
||||
*
|
||||
* Copyright 2008, Haiku. All rights reserved.
|
||||
* Copyright 2008-2011, Haiku. All rights reserved.
|
||||
* Distributed under the terms of the MIT License.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* Authors:
|
||||
@@ -60,13 +60,21 @@
|
||||
<li><p>Die Deskbar ist sozusagen Haikus "Start" Menü und Taskbar, siehe <a href="deskbar.html">Deskbar</a>.</p></li>
|
||||
<li>Der gelbe Reiter zeigt mehr als den Programm- oder Dateinamen:
|
||||
<ul><li>Er lässt sich verschieben, indem man die <span class="key">SHIFT</span> Taste gedrückt hält, während man ihn an eine andere Position zieht. So lassen sich einige Fenster hintereinander anordnen, und bleiben durch ihre beschrifteten Reiter einfach erreichbar.</li>
|
||||
<li>Durch einen Doppelklick auf den Reiter werden Fenster minimiert (oder per <span class="key">CTRL</span> <span class="key">ALT</span> <span class="key">M</span>). Auf ein so minimiertes Fenster kann über dessen Eintrag in der <a href="deskbar.html">Deskbar</a> oder dem <a href="twitcher.html">Twitcher</a> zugegriffen werden.</li>
|
||||
<li>Durch einen Doppelklick auf den Reiter werden Fenster minimiert (oder per <span class="key">STRG</span> <span class="key">ALT</span> <span class="key">M</span>). Auf ein so minimiertes Fenster kann über dessen Eintrag in der <a href="deskbar.html">Deskbar</a> oder dem <a href="twitcher.html">Twitcher</a> zugegriffen werden.</li>
|
||||
<li>Ein Rechtsklick auf den Reiter eines Fensters (oder dessen Rahmen) schickt es in der Hierarchie offener Fenster ganz nach hinten.</li></ul></li>
|
||||
<li><p>Der Button zum Fenster schließen.</p></li>
|
||||
<li><p>Der "Zoom" Button (auch durch <span class="key">STRG</span> <span class="key">ALT</span> <span class="key">Z</span>). Die meisten Anwendungen ziehen damit ihr Fenster auf die Maximalgröße auf. Das muss aber nicht immer sein. Trackerfenster etwa, ändern sich so, dass der Inhalt optimal dargestellt wird.</p></li>
|
||||
<li><p>Die Ecke zum Ändern der Fenstergröße. Zieht man irgendwo anders am Rahmen eines Fensters, verschiebt man es stattdessen.</p></li>
|
||||
</ol>
|
||||
<div class="box-info">Hält man <span class="key">STRG</span> <span class="key">ALT</span> gedrückt, kann man mit der linken Maustaste irgendwo in ein Fenster klicken, um es zu verschieben; die rechte Maustaste schickt es in den Hintergrund.</div>
|
||||
|
||||
<h2>
|
||||
<a href="#"><img src="../images/up.png" style="border:none;float:right" alt="index" /></a>
|
||||
<a id="move-resize" name="move-resize">Bequem Fenstergröße und -position ändern</a></h2>
|
||||
<p>Arbeitet man mit mehreren Anwendungen gleichzeitig müssen oft Fenster verschoben oder in der Größe verändert werden. Es gibt dafür einen bequemeren Weg als auf die kleinen gelben Reiter zu zielen oder auf die noch kleineren Fensterrahmen. Und zu seiner geringen Größe kommt bei der Ecke noch dazu, dass man die Fenstergröße nur hier und auch nur in Richtung rechts und unten ändern kann.</p>
|
||||
<p>Haikus Lösung ist die Einführung des Tastenkürzels <span class="key">STRG</span> <span class="key">ALT</span> in Kombination mit der Maus. Siehe dazu auch das Kapitel <a href="keyboard-shortcuts.html#general">Tastaturkürzel und Tastenkombinationen</a> für weitere Kürzel zum Fenstermanagement.</p>
|
||||
<img src="images/gui-images/resizing.png" alt="resizing.png" />
|
||||
<p>Wird <span class="key">STRG</span> <span class="key">ALT</span> gehalten, färben sich die dem Mauszeiger nächstgelegenen Fensterrahmen. Bewegt man die Maus in die Nähe eines anderen Rahmens, ändert sich das Ziel der Aktion entsprechend. Klickt und zieht man nun die Maus mit der <i>rechten Maustaste</i>, wird das Fenster entlang der eingefärbten Seite(n) vergrößert oder verkleinert.</p>
|
||||
<p>Hält man <span class="key">STRG</span> <span class="key">ALT</span> und klickt mit der <i>linken Maustaste</i> irgendwo in ein Fenster, kann man es verschieben. Ein kurzer Klick mit der <i>rechten Maustaste</i> schickt das Fenster in den Hintergrund.</p>
|
||||
|
||||
<h2>
|
||||
<a href="#"><img src="../images/up.png" style="border:none;float:right" alt="index" /></a>
|
||||
@@ -85,7 +93,7 @@ Zum übergeordneten Verzeichnis gelangt man mit dem Pop-up Menü über der Datei
|
||||
<tr><td><span class="key">ALT</span> <span class="key">N</span></td><td></td><td>Erstellt einen neuen Ordner.</td></tr>
|
||||
<tr><td><span class="key">ALT</span> <span class="key">E</span></td><td></td><td>Benennt das ausgewählte Objekt um.</td></tr>
|
||||
<tr><td><span class="key">ALT</span> <span class="key">↑</span></td><td style="width:24px;"></td><td>Wechselt in das übergeordnete Verzeichnis.</td></tr>
|
||||
<tr><td class="onelinetop"><span class="key">ALT</span> <span class="key">↓</span> or <span class="key">ENTER</span></td><td></td><td>Wechselt in das ausgewählte Verzeichnis.</td></tr>
|
||||
<tr><td class="onelinetop"><span class="key">ALT</span> <span class="key">↓</span> or <span class="key">RETURN</span></td><td></td><td>Wechselt in das ausgewählte Verzeichnis.</td></tr>
|
||||
<tr><td><span class="key">ALT</span> <span class="key">D</span></td><td></td><td>Wechselt zum Desktop.</td></tr>
|
||||
<tr><td><span class="key">ALT</span> <span class="key">H</span></td><td></td><td>Wechselt zum Home Verzeichnis.</td></tr>
|
||||
</table>
|
||||
|
||||
|
After Width: | Height: | Size: 9.0 KiB |
|
After Width: | Height: | Size: 7.5 KiB |
|
After Width: | Height: | Size: 6.1 KiB |
|
After Width: | Height: | Size: 5.3 KiB |
|
After Width: | Height: | Size: 8.9 KiB |
@@ -4,7 +4,7 @@
|
||||
<head>
|
||||
<!--
|
||||
*
|
||||
* Copyright 2008-2010, Haiku. All rights reserved.
|
||||
* Copyright 2008-2011, Haiku. All rights reserved.
|
||||
* Distributed under the terms of the MIT License.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* Authors:
|
||||
@@ -65,17 +65,20 @@
|
||||
<table summary="shortcuts" border="0" cellspacing="0" cellpadding="4">
|
||||
<tr><td><span class="key">ALT</span> <span class="key">Fx</span></td><td style="width:15px;"></td><td>Wechselt zum <a href="workspaces.html">Workspace</a> X (<span class="key">Fx</span> ist dabei die dem Workspace entsprechende Funktionstaste). Hält man dabei zusätzlich die <span class="key">SHIFT</span>-Taste, wird das aktive Fenster zum neuen Workspace mitgenommen.</td></tr>
|
||||
<tr><td class="onelinetop"><span class="key">STRG</span> <span class="key">ALT</span> <span class="key">←</span> / <span class="key">→</span> / <span class="key">↑</span> / <span class="key">↓</span></td><td></td><td>Zum Bewegen durch die Reihen und Spalten der verfügbaren Workspaces. Hält man dabei zusätzlich die <span class="key">SHIFT</span>-Taste, wird das aktive Fenster zum neuen Workspace mitgenommen.</td></tr>
|
||||
<tr><td><span class="key">STRG</span> <span class="key">ALT</span> + Linksklick</td><td></td><td>Klickt und zieht man mit der linken Maustaste wird das Fenster verschoben (siehe dazu <a href="gui.html#move-resize">Haikus Benutzeroberfläche</a>).</td></tr>
|
||||
<tr><td><span class="key">STRG</span> <span class="key">ALT</span> + Rechtsklick</td><td></td><td>Klickt und zieht man mit der rechten Maustaste wird die Fenstergröße geändert (siehe dazu <a href="gui.html#move-resize">Haikus Benutzeroberfläche</a>).</td></tr>
|
||||
<tr><td><span class="key">STRG</span> <span class="key">ALT</span> <span class="key">Z</span></td><td></td><td>Zoomt ein Fenster auf eine alternative Größe (meist die Maximalgröße).</td></tr>
|
||||
<tr><td><span class="key">STRG</span> <span class="key">ALT</span> <span class="key">M</span></td><td></td><td>Minimiert das aktive Fenster.</td></tr>
|
||||
<tr><td><span class="key">STRG</span> <span class="key">ALT</span> <span class="key">H</span></td><td></td><td>Minimiert alle Fenster der aktiven Anwendung.</td></tr>
|
||||
<tr><td><span class="key">STRG</span> <span class="key">ALT</span> <span class="key">F</span></td><td></td><td>Holt das aktive Fenster in den Vordergrund (nur sinnvoll mit der Mauseinstellung <a href="preferences/mouse.html">Focus Follows Mouse</a>).</td></tr>
|
||||
<tr><td><span class="key">STRG</span> <span class="key">ALT</span> <span class="key">B</span></td><td></td><td>Schickt das aktive Fenster in den Hintergrund.</td></tr>
|
||||
<tr><td><span class="key">STRG</span> <span class="key">TAB</span></td><td></td><td>Gedrückt halten, um den <a href="twitcher.html">Twitcher</a> aufzurufen.</td></tr>
|
||||
<tr><td><span class="key">STRG</span> <span class="key">ALT</span> <span class="key">ENTF</span></td><td></td><td>Öffnet den <a href="teammonitor.html">Team Monitor</a>.</td></tr>
|
||||
<tr><td><span class="key">ALT</span> <span class="key">ESC</span></td><td></td><td>Aktiviert die Menüleiste (Verlassen mit <span class="key">ESC</span>).</td></tr>
|
||||
<tr><td><span class="key">ALT</span> <span class="key">C</span></td><td></td><td>Kopiert die Auswahl ins Clipboard.</td></tr>
|
||||
<tr><td><span class="key">ALT</span> <span class="key">X</span></td><td></td><td>Schneidet die Auswahl aus und kopiert sie ins Clipboard.</td></tr>
|
||||
<tr><td><span class="key">ALT</span> <span class="key">V</span></td><td></td><td>Fügt den Inhalt des Clipboards ein.</td></tr>
|
||||
<tr><td><span class="key">ALT</span> <span class="key">W</span></td><td></td><td>Schließt das aktive Fenster.</td></tr><tr><td><span class="key">STRG</span> <span class="key">ALT</span> <span class="key">Z</span></td><td></td><td>Zoomt ein Fenster auf eine alternative Größe (meist die Maximalgröße).</td></tr>
|
||||
<tr><td><span class="key">STRG</span> <span class="key">ALT</span> <span class="key">M</span></td><td></td><td>Minimiert das aktive Fenster.</td></tr>
|
||||
<tr><td><span class="key">STRG</span> <span class="key">ALT</span> <span class="key">H</span></td><td></td><td>Minimiert alle Fenster der aktiven Anwendung.</td></tr>
|
||||
<tr><td><span class="key">STRG</span> <span class="key">ALT</span> <span class="key">F</span></td><td></td><td>Holt das aktive Fenster in den Vordergrund (nur sinnvoll mit der Mauseinstellung <a href="preferences/mouse.html">Focus Follows Mouse</a>).</td></tr>
|
||||
<tr><td><span class="key">STRG</span> <span class="key">ALT</span> <span class="key">B</span></td><td></td><td>Schickt das aktive Fenster in den Hintergrund.</td></tr>
|
||||
<tr><td><span class="key">ALT</span> <span class="key">W</span></td><td></td><td>Schließt das aktive Fenster.</td></tr>
|
||||
<tr><td><span class="key">ALT</span> <span class="key">Q</span></td><td></td><td>Beendet eine Anwendung.</td></tr>
|
||||
<tr><td><span class="key">DRUCK</span></td><td style="width:15px;"></td><td>Schießt ein Bildschirmfoto ohne Verzögerung und öffnet das <a href="applications/screenshot.html">Screenshot</a> Fenster.</td></tr>
|
||||
<tr><td class="onelinetop"><span class="key">SHIFT</span> <span class="key">DRUCK</span></td><td></td><td>Schießt ein Bildschirmfoto "heimlich" (ohne das Screenshot Fenster zu öffnen), aber mit allen beim letzten Mal getroffenen Einstellungen.</td></tr>
|
||||
@@ -88,7 +91,7 @@
|
||||
<p>Zusätzlich zu den allgemeinen Kürzeln, gibt es noch einige mehr für die Trackernavigation:</p>
|
||||
<table summary="shortcuts" border="0" cellspacing="0" cellpadding="4">
|
||||
<tr><td><span class="key">ALT</span> <span class="key">↑</span></td><td style="width:15px;"></td><td>Öffnet den übergeordneten Ordner.</td></tr>
|
||||
<tr><td class="onelinetop"><span class="key">ALT</span> <span class="key">↓</span> or <span class="key">ENTER</span></td><td></td><td>Öffnet den markierten Ordner.</td></tr>
|
||||
<tr><td class="onelinetop"><span class="key">ALT</span> <span class="key">↓</span> or <span class="key">RETURN</span></td><td></td><td>Öffnet den markierten Ordner.</td></tr>
|
||||
<tr><td><span class="key">OPT</span></td><td></td><td>Wird die Taste gehalten, während man einen Ordner öffnet, schließt sich automatisch dessen übergeordneter Ordner. Das funktioniert auch wenn man zum Navigieren die Maus benutzt.</td></tr>
|
||||
<tr><td><span class="key">MENÜ</span></td><td></td><td>Öffnet das Deskbar Menü (Verlassen mit <span class="key">ESC</span>).</td></tr>
|
||||
<tr><td><span class="key">ALT</span> <span class="key">Z</span></td><td></td><td>Macht die letzte Aktion rückgängig. Wieviele Aktionen rückgängig gemacht werden können wird nur durch den verfügbaren Speicher begrenzt. Man beachte, das funktioniert nur für Aktionen, die Dateien direkt betreffen, Änderungen an Attributen oder Zugriffsrechten können so nicht rückgängig gemacht werden. Und wenn eine Datei aus der <i>Trash</i> geleert wurde, ist sie unwiederbringlich weg.</td></tr>
|
||||
@@ -112,7 +115,7 @@
|
||||
<tr><td><span class="key">TAB</span></td><td></td><td>Tab-Vervollständigung. Nachdem einige Zeichen eingegeben wurden, komplettiert ein Druck der
|
||||
<span class="key">TAB</span> Taste einen Dateinamen oder Pfad. Gibt es mehr als einen Treffer, hält die Ausgabe an der Stelle die beginnt sich zu unterscheiden und man muss noch einige Zeichen zur weiteren Unterscheindung nachliefern. Drückt man <span class="key">TAB</span> zweimal, werden alle Treffer aufgelistet.</td></tr>
|
||||
<tr><td><span class="key">↑</span> / <span class="key">↓</span></td><td></td><td>Bewegt einen rauf und runter in einer Liste aller vorher schon mal eingegebenen Befehle.</td></tr>
|
||||
<tr><td><span class="key">STRG</span> <span class="key">R</span></td><td></td><td>Bash Historie. Alle eingegebenen Befehle werden in der Datei <span class="path">~/.bash_history</span> gespeichert. Drückt man <span class="key">STRG</span> <span class="key">R</span> und beginnt einen Befehl einzugeben, erhält man den ersten Treffer aus der Bash Historie. Jetzt kann immer wieder <span class="key">STRG</span> <span class="key">R</span> gedrückt werden bis man die gewünschte Befehlszeile finden, die man mit <span class="key">ENTER</span> ausführt.</td></tr>
|
||||
<tr><td><span class="key">STRG</span> <span class="key">R</span></td><td></td><td>Bash Historie. Alle eingegebenen Befehle werden in der Datei <span class="path">~/.bash_history</span> gespeichert. Drückt man <span class="key">STRG</span> <span class="key">R</span> und beginnt einen Befehl einzugeben, erhält man den ersten Treffer aus der Bash Historie. Jetzt kann immer wieder <span class="key">STRG</span> <span class="key">R</span> gedrückt werden bis man die gewünschte Befehlszeile finden, die man mit <span class="key">RETURN</span> ausführt.</td></tr>
|
||||
<tr><td><span class="key">STRG</span> <span class="key">C</span></td><td></td><td>Beendet den momentan ausgeführten Befehl.</td></tr>
|
||||
<tr><td><span class="key">STRG</span> <span class="key">D</span></td><td></td><td>Beendet die aktuelle Terminal Session.</td></tr>
|
||||
</table>
|
||||
@@ -126,7 +129,8 @@
|
||||
<tr><td><span class="key">ALT</span></td><td></td><td>Fügt das angeklickte Objekt der Auswahl hinzu oder entfernt es aus ihr.</td></tr>
|
||||
</table>
|
||||
<p>Beginnt man in einem Tracker Fenster Zeichen einzutippen, wird das Fenster entsprechend gescrollt und die Datei ausgewählt, die dieser inkrementellen Suche am besten entspricht. Existiert keine Datei, die mit den eingegebenen Zeichen anfängt, wird die Datei markiert, die diese Zeichen irgendwo in ihrem Namen oder in sonst einem angezeigten Attribut enthält. Diese Suche unterscheidet <i>keine</i> Groß- und Kleinbuchstaben.<br />
|
||||
Die eingegebenen Zeichen erscheinen unten links, wo ansonsten die Anzahl der Objekte steht. Nach einer Sekunde springt die Anzeige dort wieder zurück und man könnte mit einer neuen inkrementellen Suche beginnen.</p>
|
||||
Die eingegebenen Zeichen erscheinen unten links, wo ansonsten die Anzahl der Objekte steht. Nach einer Sekunde springt die Anzeige dort wieder zurück und man könnte mit einer neuen inkrementellen Suche beginnen.<br />
|
||||
Anstatt zur ersten Fundstelle der eingegbenen Zeichen zu springen, lässt sich Tracker auch so einstellen, dass alle nicht der Suche entsprechenden Dateien herausgefiltert werden. Siehe dazu das Thema <a href="tracker.html#tracker-preferences">Dateien filtern</a>.</p>
|
||||
|
||||
</div>
|
||||
</div>
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -77,7 +77,7 @@ Glyph Hinting</h3>
|
||||
<p>Aktiviert man <span class="menu">Glyph hinting</span>, werden alle Buchstaben so ausgerichtet, dass ihre horizontalen und vertikalen Ränder genau zwischen zwei Pixel liegen. Dadurch erreicht man einen sehr guten Kontrast, besonders bei Darstellungen von schwarz auf weiß. Text erscheint schärfer. Die Einstellung <span class="menu">Monospaced Fonts Only</span> beschränkt das Hinting auf Schriften fixer Breite und ist gerade bei Geräten mit geringen Auflösungen, wie Netbooks, interessant. Bei kleinen Schriftarten kann das Hinting ziemlich schlimm aussehen. Mit dieser Einstellung hat man die Vorteile aber zumindest noch in Texteditoren und im Terminal.</p>
|
||||
<p>Hier sieht man den Unterschied von Hinting anhand vergrößerter Screenshots:</p>
|
||||
<table summary="layout" border="0" cellspacing="0" cellpadding="2">
|
||||
<tr><td style="text-align:center; font-style:italic"><img src="../../images/prefs-images/appearance-glyph-off.png" alt="appearance-glyph-off.png" /><br />Hinting: aus</td><td style="width:15px;"></td><td style="text-align:center; font-style:italic"><img src="../../images/prefs-images/appearance-glyph-on.png" alt="appearance-glyph-on.png" /><br />Hinting: an</td></tr>
|
||||
<tr><td style="text-align:center; font-style:italic"><img src="../images/prefs-images/appearance-glyph-off.png" alt="appearance-glyph-off.png" /><br />Hinting: aus</td><td style="width:15px;"></td><td style="text-align:center; font-style:italic"><img src="../images/prefs-images/appearance-glyph-on.png" alt="appearance-glyph-on.png" /><br />Hinting: an</td></tr>
|
||||
</table>
|
||||
<p>Es sei angemerkt, dass alle <span class="app">Magnify</span> Fenster auf dieser Seite natürlich auch selbst mit den verschiedenen Optionen dargestellt werden. So bekommt man einen echten Eindruck der Einstellungen, indem man zum Beispiel die fetten Titel der Fensterreiter vergleicht, oder den Text "33 x 15 @ 8 pixels/pixel".</p>
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -89,13 +89,13 @@ Antialiasing Typ</h3>
|
||||
<span class="menu">LCD subpixel</span> macht das noch besser, vor allem bei (hochauflösenden) LCD Monitoren. Anstatt der Intensität eines Pixels, wird die Farbe so geändert, dass eine Kante nur einen Bruchteil eines Pixels bewegt wird, da LCD Schirme jeden Pixel aus einer roten, grünen und blauen Komponente zusammensetzen.</p>
|
||||
<p>Hier wieder die beiden Methoden anhand vergrößerter Screenshots:</p>
|
||||
<table summary="layout" border="0" cellspacing="0" cellpadding="2">
|
||||
<tr><td style="text-align:center; font-style:italic"><img src="../../images/prefs-images/appearance-glyph-off.png" alt="appearance-glyph-off.png" /><br />Grayscale, Hinting: aus</td><td style="width:15px;"></td><td style="text-align:center; font-style:italic"><img src="../../images/prefs-images/appearance-subpixel.png" alt="appearance-subpixel.png" /><br />LCD subpixel, Hinting: aus</td></tr>
|
||||
<tr><td style="text-align:center; font-style:italic"><img src="../images/prefs-images/appearance-glyph-off.png" alt="appearance-glyph-off.png" /><br />Grayscale, Hinting: aus</td><td style="width:15px;"></td><td style="text-align:center; font-style:italic"><img src="../images/prefs-images/appearance-subpixel.png" alt="appearance-subpixel.png" /><br />LCD subpixel, Hinting: aus</td></tr>
|
||||
</table>
|
||||
<p>Subpixel Antialiasing verleiht Objekten einen leicht farbigen Umriss, den nicht jeder mag. In Haiku kann man beide Antialiasing Methoden mischen und die für einen richtige Einstellung mit einem Schieberegler finden.</p>
|
||||
<div class="box-info">Die Kombination von Subpixel Antialiasing und Glyph Hinting ist durch ein Softwarepatent geschützt und daher nicht von Haus aus verfügbar. Je nachdem in welchem Land der Erde man lebt, bekommt man u.U. eine dieses Feature enthaltende Version. Das ist sehr schade. Abhilfe könnte eventuell eine Petition bringen.</div>
|
||||
<p>Wenn Glyph Hinting zusammen mit LCD Subpixel Antialiasing aktiviert wird, indem man den Sourcecode entsprechend ändert und neu kompiliert, sieht das so im Vergleich mit Hinting bei Grayscale Antialiasing aus:</p>
|
||||
<table summary="layout" border="0" cellspacing="0" cellpadding="2">
|
||||
<tr><td style="text-align:center; font-style:italic"><img src="../../images/prefs-images/appearance-glyph-on.png" alt="appearance-glyph-on.png" /><br />Grayscale, Hinting: an</td><td style="width:15px;"></td><td style="text-align:center; font-style:italic"><img src="../../images/prefs-images/appearance-glyph-on-subpixel.png" alt="appearance-glyph-on-subpixel.png" /><br />LCD subpixel, Hinting: an</td></tr>
|
||||
<tr><td style="text-align:center; font-style:italic"><img src="../images/prefs-images/appearance-glyph-on.png" alt="appearance-glyph-on.png" /><br />Grayscale, Hinting: an</td><td style="width:15px;"></td><td style="text-align:center; font-style:italic"><img src="../images/prefs-images/appearance-glyph-on-subpixel.png" alt="appearance-glyph-on-subpixel.png" /><br />LCD subpixel, Hinting: an</td></tr>
|
||||
</table>
|
||||
<p><br /></p>
|
||||
<p>Ganz unten im Fenster befinden sich zwei Buttons:</p>
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -11,6 +11,7 @@
|
||||
* Humdinger <[email protected]>
|
||||
* Translators:
|
||||
* Matthias
|
||||
* Humdinger
|
||||
*
|
||||
-->
|
||||
<meta http-equiv="content-type" content="text/html; charset=utf-8" />
|
||||
@@ -58,7 +59,7 @@
|
||||
</table>
|
||||
<p><br /></p>
|
||||
<img src="../images/prefs-images/mouse.png" alt="mouse.png" />
|
||||
<p>Im Auswahlmenü links kann die Art der Maus, respektive deren Tastenzahl, ausgewählt werden. Insbesondere für 1-Tasten Mäuse interessant: der Rechtsklick kann mit <span class="key">CTRL</span>-Linksklick und ein Klick auf die mittlere Taste mit <span class="key">CTRL</span> <span class="key">ALT</span>-Linksklick erzeugt werden. Der mittlere Klick kann bei 2-Tasten Mäuse auch mit einen Klick auf beide Tasten erreicht werden.</p>
|
||||
<p>Im Auswahlmenü links kann die Art der Maus, respektive deren Tastenzahl, ausgewählt werden. Insbesondere für 1-Tasten Mäuse interessant: der Rechtsklick kann mit <span class="key">STRG</span>-Linksklick und ein Klick auf die mittlere Taste mit <span class="key">STRG</span> <span class="key">ALT</span>-Linksklick erzeugt werden. Der mittlere Klick kann bei 2-Tasten Mäuse auch mit einen Klick auf beide Tasten erreicht werden.</p>
|
||||
<p>Die Tastenbelegung kann über das Markieren der entsprechenden Taste und dem dazugehörigen Auswahlmenü geändert werden.</p>
|
||||
<p>Über die Schieberegler rechts kann die Doppelklick-Geschwindigkeit, die Geschwindigkeit des Mauszeigers und seine Beschleunigung eingestellt werden.</p>
|
||||
<p><span class="menu">Focus follows mouse</span> bewirkt, dass ein Programmfenster nicht angeklickt wird, um es zu Aktivieren. Hierfür gibt es drei Möglichkeiten:</p>
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -93,7 +93,7 @@ Eine gespeicherte Query muss man aber nicht doppelklicken, um an aktuelle Ergebn
|
||||
<h2>
|
||||
<a href="#"><img src="../images/up.png" style="border:none;float:right" alt="index" /></a>
|
||||
<a id="basic-query" name="basic-query">Einfache Suche - "by Name"</a></h2>
|
||||
<p>Will man einfach nur alle Dateien und Ordner auf den eingehängten Datenträgern finden, die einem bestimmten Muster entsprechen, belässt man die Suchmethode einfach auf <span class="menu">by Name</span>, füllt das Suchfeld entsprechend aus und drückt <span class="key">ENTER</span>.</p>
|
||||
<p>Will man einfach nur alle Dateien und Ordner auf den eingehängten Datenträgern finden, die einem bestimmten Muster entsprechen, belässt man die Suchmethode einfach auf <span class="menu">by Name</span>, füllt das Suchfeld entsprechend aus und drückt <span class="key">RETURN</span>.</p>
|
||||
|
||||
<h2>
|
||||
<a href="#"><img src="../images/up.png" style="border:none;float:right" alt="index" /></a>
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -74,7 +74,7 @@
|
||||
<a id="mounting-volumes" name="mounting-volumes">Einbinden von Datenträgern</a></h2>
|
||||
<p>Um einen Datenträger (sei es eine Festplatte oder Partition, eine CD oder USB-Stick) unter Haiku verwenden zu können, muss dieser erst in das System eingebunden werden. Über einen Rechtsklick auf den Arbeitsplatz oder einem bereits eingebundenen Datenträger kann der Menüpunkt <span class="menu">Mount</span> aufgerufen werden. Dieser Punkt <span class="menu">Mount</span> findet sich auch in der Deskbar.</p>
|
||||
<img src="images/tracker-images/mount-settings.png" alt="drill-down.png" />
|
||||
<p>Über die <span class="menu">Mount Settings</span> können Einstellungen vorgenommen werden, ob und welche Datenträger bei einem Systemstart eingebunden werden<br />
|
||||
<p>Über <span class="menu">Settings</span> können Einstellungen vorgenommen werden, ob und welche Datenträger bei einem Systemstart eingebunden werden<br />
|
||||
Im obigen Bild beispielsweise werden automatisch alle Datenträger eingebunden, die während dem Betrieb hinzugefügt werden (beispielsweise eine CD oder ein USB-Stick) und während dem Systemstart nur die Datenträger, die beim letzten Mal eingebunden waren.</p>
|
||||
<div class="box-warning">Bevor man einen Datenträger, wie zum Beispiel einen USB-Stick, vom Computer trennt, sollte man ihn unbedingt vorher über "unmount" im System abmelden. Nur so wird sichergestellt, dass alle Dateioperationen auf diesem Datenträger vollständig abgeschlossen wurden. Anderenfalls ist ein Datenverlust nicht auszuschließen!</div>
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -139,14 +139,12 @@ Dieses "type-ahead" filtern wird in den <a href="#tracker-preferences.html">Trac
|
||||
<p>Über <span class="menu">Window | Preferences...</span> wird ein Fenster geöffnet, dessen zahlreiche Einstellungen sich stellenweise nicht sofort erschließen. Da jedoch alle Einstellungen direkt angewendet werden, kann man die Änderungen sofort erkennen.<br />Hier eine kurze Erklärung zu den nicht ganz offensichtlichen Einstellungen:</p>
|
||||
<ul>
|
||||
<li><p><b>Desktop</b> - Hier kann ausgewählt werden, ob jedes eingebundene Laufwerk für sich am Arbeitsplatz angezeigt wird, oder alle zusammen in einem Tracker-Fenster, das mit dem Icon "Disks" repräsentiert wird.</p></li>
|
||||
<li><p><b>Windows</b> - Wenn man <span class="menu">Single Window Navigation</span> markiert, wird jeder geöffnete Ordner im gleichen Fenster, statt in seinem eigenen angezeigt. Diese Einstellung unterscheidet sich zu der oben erwähnten Möglichkeit, einen Ordner bei gedrückter <span class="key">OPT</span>-Taste zu öffnen, da hier die individuellen Einstellungen zu Anzeige und Position des Fensters verloren gehen.
|
||||
<li><p><b>Windows</b> - Wenn man <span class="menu">Single window navigation</span> markiert, wird jeder geöffnete Ordner im gleichen Fenster, statt in seinem eigenen angezeigt. Diese Einstellung unterscheidet sich zu der oben erwähnten Möglichkeit, einen Ordner bei gedrückter <span class="key">OPT</span>-Taste zu öffnen, da hier die individuellen Einstellungen zu Anzeige und Position des Fensters verloren gehen.
|
||||
<br /><br />
|
||||
<img src="images/tracker-images/tracker-preferences-navigator.png" alt="tracker-preferences-navigator.png" />
|
||||
</p>
|
||||
<p>Auch wenn die Ein-Fenster-Navigation sich vielleicht vertrauter anfühlt, sollte man der ursprünglichen Navigation von Haiku eine Chance geben, da es durchaus sein kann, dass man hiermit schneller navigiert. Andererseits bietet nur diese Einstellung die Möglichkeit, einen <i>Navigator</i> einzublenden, in dem man "vor" und "zurück", sowie ein Verzeichnis höher gehen und einen neuen Verzeichnispfad hineinkopieren kann.</p>
|
||||
<p>Anstatt zu den Dateien zu springen während man lostippt, gibt es auch noch die Möglichkeit alle Dateien rauszufiltern, die die eingegebene Zeichenfolge nicht enthalten. Dadurch werden gerade Verzeichnisse mit Unmengen an Dateien auf einmal sehr übersichtlich.<br />
|
||||
Im Gegensatz zum Dateien-anspringen bleibt der Filter aktiv, bis <span class="key">ESC</span> gedrückt wird oder das Fenster geschlossen wird (bzw. bei der Nutzung von Single Window Navigation, der Ordner gewechselt wird.)<br />
|
||||
Dieses "type-ahead" filtern wird in den <a href="#tracker-preferences.html">Tracker Einstellungen</a> aktiviert.</p></li>
|
||||
<p>Auch wenn die Ein-Fenster-Navigation sich vielleicht vertrauter anfühlt, sollte man der ursprünglichen Navigation von Haiku eine Chance geben, da es durchaus sein kann, dass man hiermit schneller navigiert. Andererseits bietet nur diese Einstellung die Möglichkeit, einen <i>Navigator</i> einzublenden, in dem man per Symbol "vor" und "zurück", sowie ein Verzeichnis höher gehen und einen neuen Verzeichnispfad hineinkopieren kann.</p>
|
||||
<p>Anstatt zu den Dateien zu springen während man lostippt, gibt es mit <span class="menu">Type-ahead filtering</span> auch noch die Möglichkeit alle Dateien rauszufiltern, die die eingegebene Zeichenfolge nicht enthalten, siehe <a href="#type-ahead-filter">weiter oben</a>.</p></li>
|
||||
<li><p><b>Date and Time</b> - Einstellung des Datumsformats für die Tracker-Fenster.</p></li>
|
||||
<li><p><b>Trash</b> - Die Verhaltensweise beim Löschen einer Datei kann hier eingestellt werden.</p></li>
|
||||
<li><p><b>Volume Icons</b> - Die Farbe des optionalen Füllstandsanzeigers bei den eingebundenen Datenträger kann hier eingestellt werden.</p></li>
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -12,6 +12,7 @@
|
||||
* Translators:
|
||||
* Matthias
|
||||
* taos
|
||||
* Humdinger
|
||||
*
|
||||
-->
|
||||
<meta http-equiv="content-type" content="text/html; charset=utf-8" />
|
||||
@@ -55,9 +56,9 @@
|
||||
|
||||
<p>Mit dem Twitcher kann auf einfache Weise zwischen laufenden Anwendungen und ihren Fenstern gewechselt werden.</p>
|
||||
<img src="../images/twitcher-images/twitcher.png" alt="twitcher.png" />
|
||||
<p>Mit <span class="key">CTRL</span> <span class="key">TAB</span> wechselt man zwischen der aktuellen und der zuletzt aktiven Anwendung. Wenn <span class="key">CTRL</span> <span class="key">TAB</span> schnell mehrfach gedrückt wird, wechselt man durch alle Anwendungen. Durch Drücken und Halten von <span class="key">CTRL</span> <span class="key">TAB</span> kann man mittels wiederholtem Drücken von <span class="key">TAB</span> oder <span class="key">←</span> / <span class="key">→</span> zum gewünschten Programm wechseln. Zu einem speziellen Fenster einer Anwendung gelangt man durch Drücken von <span class="key">↑</span> oder <span class="key">↓</span>, wenn das Anwendungs-Icon hinterlegt ist.</p>
|
||||
<p>Man kann durch alle Fenster einer Anwendung im aktuellen Workspace wechseln, indem man <span class="key">CTRL</span> <span class="key">~</span> drückt. Die Tilde ist je nach Tastaturlayout an unterschiedlichen Stellen; im Deutschen ist sie neben der <span class="key">Return</span>-Taste.</p>
|
||||
<p>Es ist auch möglich, den Twitcher über <span class="key">CTRL</span> <span class="key">TAB</span> aufzurufen, und dann das gewünschte Programm, beziehungsweise das Programmfenster mit der Maus auszuwählen; hierbei ist aber die <span class="key">CTRL</span>-Taste gedrückt zu halten.</p>
|
||||
<p>Mit <span class="key">STRG</span> <span class="key">TAB</span> wechselt man zwischen der aktuellen und der zuletzt aktiven Anwendung. Wenn <span class="key">STRG</span> <span class="key">TAB</span> schnell mehrfach gedrückt wird, wechselt man durch alle Anwendungen. Durch Drücken und Halten von <span class="key">STRG</span> <span class="key">TAB</span> kann man mittels wiederholtem Drücken von <span class="key">TAB</span> oder <span class="key">←</span> / <span class="key">→</span> zum gewünschten Programm wechseln. Zu einem speziellen Fenster einer Anwendung gelangt man durch Drücken von <span class="key">↑</span> oder <span class="key">↓</span>, wenn das Anwendungs-Icon hinterlegt ist.</p>
|
||||
<p>Man kann durch alle Fenster einer Anwendung im aktuellen Workspace wechseln, indem man <span class="key">STRG</span> <span class="key">~</span> drückt. Die Tilde ist je nach Tastaturlayout an unterschiedlichen Stellen; im Deutschen ist sie neben der <span class="key">Return</span>-Taste.</p>
|
||||
<p>Es ist auch möglich, den Twitcher über <span class="key">STRG</span> <span class="key">TAB</span> aufzurufen, und dann das gewünschte Programm, beziehungsweise das Programmfenster mit der Maus auszuwählen; hierbei ist aber die <span class="key">STRG</span>-Taste gedrückt zu halten.</p>
|
||||
<p>Der Twitcher hat zusätzlich noch einige Tastaturkürzel:</p>
|
||||
<table summary="more shortcuts" border="0" cellspacing="0" cellpadding="4">
|
||||
<tr><td><span class="key">ESC</span></td><td style="width:15px;"></td><td>Beendet den Twitcher und das letzte aktive Programm ist wieder aktiviert.</td></tr>
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -112,7 +112,7 @@ Otherwise, uninstalling is simply done by deleting the application's folder.</p>
|
||||
<tr><td style="width:24px;"><img src="../images/apps-images/mediaplayer-icon_16.png" alt="icon" width="16" height="16" /></td><td><a href="applications/mediaplayer.html">MediaPlayer</a></td><td> </td>
|
||||
<td valign="top">A player for all supported audio/video files.</td></tr>
|
||||
<tr><td style="width:24px;"><img src="../images/apps-images/midiplayer-icon_16.png" alt="icon" width="16" height="16" /></td><td><a href="applications/midiplayer.html">MidiPlayer</a></td><td> </td>
|
||||
<td valign="top"><span style="color:silver">A player for MIDI files. [<i>still missing</i>]</span></td></tr>
|
||||
<td valign="top">A player for MIDI files.</td></tr>
|
||||
<tr><td style="width:24px;"><img src="../images/apps-images/packageinstaller-icon_16.png" alt="icon" width="16" height="16" /></td><td><a href="applications/packageinstaller.html">PackageInstaller</a></td><td> </td>
|
||||
<td valign="top"><span style="color:silver">Installer for BeOS packages in PKG format. [<i>still missing</i>]</span></td></tr>
|
||||
<tr><td style="width:24px;"><img src="../images/apps-images/people-icon_16.png" alt="icon" width="16" height="16" /></td><td><a href="applications/people.html">People</a></td><td> </td>
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -57,8 +57,8 @@
|
||||
<p><br /></p>
|
||||
<p>CharacterMap will show you the UTF-8 code of every character a font supports.</p>
|
||||
<img src="../images/apps-images/charactermap.png" alt="charactermap.png" />
|
||||
<p>To the left you have the standardized blocks, together with a handy filter function. Optionally, you can choose to also <span class="menu">Show Private Blocks</span> from the <span class="menu">View</span> menu. The right shows the actual characters in these blocks, using the font specified in the <span class="menu">Font</span> menu. Below that you can change the font size. And below that, the values of the character currently under the mouse pointer is displayed in hex, decimal and UTF-8 notation.</p>
|
||||
<p>You can drag&drop a character directly from the character map into a text editor, or right-click on one to either <span class="menu">Copy Character</span> (<span class="key">ALT</span> <span class="key">C</span>) or <span class="menu">Copy As Escaped Byte String</span> (<span class="key">SHIFT</span> <span class="key">ALT</span> <span class="key">C</span>). Resulting in, e.g. either <tt>€</tt> or <tt>\xe2\x82\xac</tt>.</p>
|
||||
<p>To the left you have the standardized blocks, together with a handy filter function. Optionally, you can choose to also <span class="menu">Show private blocks</span> from the <span class="menu">View</span> menu. The right shows the actual characters in these blocks, using the font specified in the <span class="menu">Font</span> menu. Below that you can change the font size. And below that, the values of the character currently under the mouse pointer is displayed in hex, decimal and UTF-8 notation.</p>
|
||||
<p>You can drag&drop a character directly from the character map into a text editor, or right-click on one to either <span class="menu">Copy character</span> (<span class="key">ALT</span> <span class="key">C</span>) or <span class="menu">Copy as escaped byte string</span> (<span class="key">SHIFT</span> <span class="key">ALT</span> <span class="key">C</span>). Resulting in, e.g. either <tt>€</tt> or <tt>\xe2\x82\xac</tt>.</p>
|
||||
|
||||
</div>
|
||||
</div>
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -68,14 +68,14 @@ Also, be aware that <tt>.</tt> and <tt>,</tt> are both considered floating point
|
||||
<li><p>Right-clicking offers these options:</p>
|
||||
<table summary="layout" border="0" cellspacing="0" cellpadding="2">
|
||||
<tr><td><span class="menu">Enable Num Lock on start up</span></td><td style="width:15px;"></td><td>automatically activates the number block when launching DeskCalc</td></tr>
|
||||
<tr><td><span class="menu">Show Keypad</span></td><td></td><td>hides the keypad when deactivated</td></tr>
|
||||
<tr><td><span class="menu">Show keypad</span></td><td></td><td>hides the keypad when deactivated</td></tr>
|
||||
</table></li>
|
||||
<li><p>You can resize the calculator until it fits your needs and then put it as <a href="../gui.html#replicants">Replicant</a> onto the Desktop via drag&drop of the symbol in the bottom right corner. Make sure <span class="menu">Show Replicants</span> is activated in the Deskbar.</p></li>
|
||||
<li><p>You can resize the calculator until it fits your needs and then put it as <a href="../gui.html#replicants">Replicant</a> onto the Desktop via drag&drop of the symbol in the bottom right corner. Make sure <span class="menu">Show replicants</span> is activated in the Deskbar.</p></li>
|
||||
<li><p>The keypad can be colored with a drag&drop from any color well, e.g. from <span class="app">Icon-O-Matic</span>.</p></li>
|
||||
<li><p>You can move up and down in a history of past calculations with <span class="key">↑</span> and <span class="key">↓</span>.</p></li>
|
||||
<li><p>You can select DeskCalc's contents and drag&drop it into any application. Or you drop it into a Tracker window or onto the Desktop and a text file with that clipping is created there.</p>
|
||||
<p>Even better, the reverse is also possible:<br />
|
||||
Create clippings as described at various stages of your calculation and go back to them by drag&dropping them back into DeskCalc.<br />
|
||||
Create clippings as described at various stages of your calculation and go back to them by drag & dropping them back into DeskCalc.<br />
|
||||
Or you drag&drop a calculation directly out of an email onto DeskCalc.</p></li>
|
||||
<li><p>DeskCalc can be used in Terminal. Just put the expression in double quotes, like this:</p>
|
||||
<pre class="terminal">~> DeskCalc "sin(45)*(cos(12)+3.45)"
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -69,7 +69,7 @@ Which brings us to this:</p>
|
||||
<p>When you found unformatted space on a drive, like the above <tt><empty></tt>, you can create a new partition in this space with <span class="menu">Partition | Create...</span>(<span class="key">ALT</span> <span class="key">C</span>).</p>
|
||||
<img src="../images/apps-images/drivesetup-create.png" alt="drivesetup-create.png" />
|
||||
<p>You're prompted with this dialog that lets you adjust the partition size and type. Choose <span class="menu">Be File System</span> if you want to use the partition for an Haiku installation or if you want to use all the interesting Haiku features with it, like attributes and queries. Note, that other operating systems might not be able to access such a partition.</p>
|
||||
<p>If you have created a primary partition instead of just another extended/logical partition within one, the above dialog also displays an <span class="menu">Active Partition</span> checkbox. You'll have to check that, if you'll use that partition to boot a Haiku installation.</p>
|
||||
<p>If you have created a primary partition instead of just another extended/logical partition within one, the above dialog also displays an <span class="menu">Active partition</span> checkbox. You'll have to check that, if you'll use that partition to boot a Haiku installation.</p>
|
||||
<p>Before you can use, or even mount the newly created partition, it has to be initialized with a filesystem.</p>
|
||||
<h2>
|
||||
<a href="#"><img src="../../images/up.png" style="border:none;float:right" alt="index" /></a>
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -63,7 +63,7 @@ Just double-click an archive to see this simple interface:</p>
|
||||
<tr><td><span class="button">Destination</span></td><td><span class="key">ALT</span> <span class="key">D</span></td><td>will open a file dialog to set the destination.</td></tr>
|
||||
<tr><td><span class="button">Expand</span></td><td><span class="key">ALT</span> <span class="key">E</span></td><td>will start the unpacking. It can be aborted with <span class="key">ALT</span> <span class="key">K</span>.</td></tr>
|
||||
</table>
|
||||
<p>You can toggle the display of the file listing by un/checking <i>Show Contents</i> or pressing <span class="key">ALT</span> <span class="key">L</span>.</p>
|
||||
<p>You can toggle the display of the file listing by un/checking <i>Show contents</i> or pressing <span class="key">ALT</span> <span class="key">L</span>.</p>
|
||||
<div class="box-info">Expander can only unpack whole archives.<br />
|
||||
You can't select individual files to expand or add/remove files from the archive.</div>
|
||||
<p><span class="menu">Edit | Preferences...</span> or <span class="key">ALT</span> <span class="key">P</span> opens a preference panel that offers some useful settings to adjust Expander's behavior.<br />
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -103,7 +103,7 @@ Take this icon of the Terminal, for example:</p>
|
||||
<h2>
|
||||
<a href="#"><img src="../../images/up.png" style="border:none;float:right" alt="index" /></a>
|
||||
<a id="icons-attributes" name="icons-attributes">Icons are attributes</a></h2>
|
||||
<p>Icons are stored as an attribute with their file. However, that doesn't mean that every file has to have this attribute to appear with an icon in a Tracker window: data files inherit their icon from their filetype. To globally change the filetype's icon you use the <span class="app">FileTypes</span> preferences. If you only want to add a special icon to an individual file, you use the <span class="app">FileType Add-On</span> on it instead. See topic <a href="../filetypes.html">Filetypes</a> for more information.</p>
|
||||
<p>Icons are stored as an attribute with their file. However, that doesn't mean that every file has to have this attribute to appear with an icon in a Tracker window: data files inherit their icon from their filetype. To globally change the filetype's icon you use the <span class="app">FileTypes</span> preferences. If you only want to add a special icon to an individual file, you use the <span class="app">FileType add-on</span> on it instead. See topic <a href="../filetypes.html">Filetypes</a> for more information.</p>
|
||||
<div class="box-info">Being an attribute, it follows that only filesystems supporting metadata can retain a file's individual icon. So, if you move files off your BFS volume, consider zipping them up so you don't lose icons or other attributes.</div>
|
||||
|
||||
<h2>
|
||||
@@ -164,13 +164,13 @@ Selected points are deleted by pressing <span class="key">DEL</span> or by click
|
||||
</table>
|
||||
|
||||
<h4><a id="i-o-m-path-menu" name="i-o-m-path-menu">Path Menu</a></h4>
|
||||
<p>The <span class="menu">Path</span> menu offers a few obvious entries to <span class="menu">Add Rectangle</span> and <span class="menu">Add Circle</span> or to <span class="menu">Duplicate</span> or <span class="menu">Remove</span> a path. Here are some that may need a bit more explaining:</p>
|
||||
<p>The <span class="menu">Path</span> menu offers a few obvious entries to <span class="menu">Add rectangle</span> and <span class="menu">Add circle</span> or to <span class="menu">Duplicate</span> or <span class="menu">Remove</span> a path. Here are some that may need a bit more explaining:</p>
|
||||
|
||||
<table summary="Path menu" border="0" cellspacing="0" cellpadding="2">
|
||||
<tr><td><span class="menu">Reverse</span></td><td style="width:15px;"></td><td>If your path isn't "closed" (see Path Properties below), a click into the canvas always creates a new point, connecting it with the last one. "Reverse" will reverse this order and your new point will connect to original start point instead.</td></tr>
|
||||
<tr><td><span class="menu">Clean Up</span></td><td></td><td>Most useful with imported SVGs, this function will remove redundant points.</td></tr>
|
||||
<tr><td class="onelinetop"><span class="menu">Rotate Indices Right</span></td><td><span class="key">ALT</span> <span class="key">R</span></td><td>Practically, this rotates the opening of a path. It's best seen when using a not-closed path with a style and a shape with a stroke transformer. Now, if your path looks like a ⊂ it will rotate like this: ⊂ ∩ ⊃ ∪.</td></tr>
|
||||
<tr><td class="onelinetop"><span class="menu">Rotate Indices Left</span></td><td><span class="key">ALT</span> <span class="key">SHIFT</span> <span class="key">R</span></td><td>Does the same in the other direction.</td></tr>
|
||||
<tr><td><span class="menu">Clean up</span></td><td></td><td>Most useful with imported SVGs, this function will remove redundant points.</td></tr>
|
||||
<tr><td class="onelinetop"><span class="menu">Rotate indices right</span></td><td><span class="key">ALT</span> <span class="key">R</span></td><td>Practically, this rotates the opening of a path. It's best seen when using a not-closed path with a style and a shape with a stroke transformer. Now, if your path looks like a ⊂ it will rotate like this: ⊂ ∩ ⊃ ∪.</td></tr>
|
||||
<tr><td class="onelinetop"><span class="menu">Rotate indices left</span></td><td><span class="key">ALT</span> <span class="key">SHIFT</span> <span class="key">R</span></td><td>Does the same in the other direction.</td></tr>
|
||||
</table>
|
||||
|
||||
<h4><a id="i-o-m-path-properties" name="i-o-m-path-properties">Path Properties</a></h4>
|
||||
@@ -204,11 +204,11 @@ Selected points are deleted by pressing <span class="key">DEL</span> or by click
|
||||
<p>Shapes lie on top of each other, each is on its own layer, if you will. To reorder them you drag&drop their entry to a different position in the list.</p>
|
||||
|
||||
<h4><a id="i-o-m-shape-menu" name="i-o-m-path-menu">Shape Menu</a></h4>
|
||||
<p>The <span class="menu">Shape</span> menu offers the before mentioned possibility to <span class="menu">Add Empty, With Path/Style/Path&Style</span> and to <span class="menu">Duplicate</span> or <span class="menu">Remove</span> a shape. Then, there is:</p>
|
||||
<p>The <span class="menu">Shape</span> menu offers the before mentioned possibility to <span class="menu">Add empty, with path/style/path & style</span> and to <span class="menu">Duplicate</span> or <span class="menu">Remove</span> a shape. Then, there is:</p>
|
||||
<table summary="Shape menu" border="0" cellspacing="0" cellpadding="2">
|
||||
<tr><td><span class="menu">Reset Transformation</span></td><td style="width:15px;"></td><td>Reverts all the move, resize and rotate transformations you have applied to the shape.</td></tr>
|
||||
<tr><td class="onelinetop"><span class="menu">Freeze Transformation</span></td><td></td><td>When you transform a shape, its assigned path(s) stay in their original position. This may be intended; maybe more than one shape is using that path, maybe you intentionally used <span class="menu">Options | Snap to Grid</span> to set the points at precise pixel borders.<br />
|
||||
If not, "Freeze Transformation" will apply the current shape transformation to the assigned path(s). A future "Reset Transformation" will then return to this new state.</td></tr>
|
||||
<tr><td><span class="menu">Reset transformation</span></td><td style="width:15px;"></td><td>Reverts all the move, resize and rotate transformations you have applied to the shape.</td></tr>
|
||||
<tr><td class="onelinetop"><span class="menu">Freeze transformation</span></td><td></td><td>When you transform a shape, its assigned path(s) stay in their original position. This may be intended; maybe more than one shape is using that path, maybe you intentionally used <span class="menu">Options | Snap to grid</span> to set the points at precise pixel borders.<br />
|
||||
If not, "Freeze transformation" will apply the current shape transformation to the assigned path(s). A future "Reset Transformation" will then return to this new state.</td></tr>
|
||||
</table>
|
||||
|
||||
<h4><a id="i-o-m-shape-properties" name="i-o-m-shape-properties">Shape Properties</a></h4>
|
||||
@@ -256,7 +256,7 @@ Of course you can move these indicators to change the gradient to your liking. Y
|
||||
<p>You can move, resize and rotate the representing box of a gradient on the canvas until it fits your needs. This works just like with shapes.</p>
|
||||
|
||||
<h4><a id="i-o-m-style-menu" name="i-o-m-style-menu">Style Menu</a></h4>
|
||||
<p>The <span class="menu">Style</span> menu offers the usual entries to <span class="menu">Add</span>, <span class="menu">Duplicate</span> or <span class="menu">Remove</span> a style and to <span class="menu">Reset Transformation</span>.</p>
|
||||
<p>The <span class="menu">Style</span> menu offers the usual entries to <span class="menu">Add</span>, <span class="menu">Duplicate</span> or <span class="menu">Remove</span> a style and to <span class="menu">Reset transformation</span>.</p>
|
||||
|
||||
<h4><a id="i-o-m-style-properties" name="i-o-m-style-properties">Style Properties</a></h4>
|
||||
<p>The <span class="menu">Name</span> is the only <span class="menu">Properties</span> of a style.</p>
|
||||
@@ -279,9 +279,9 @@ Of course you can move these indicators to change the gradient to your liking. Y
|
||||
<p>Besides a <span class="menu">Name</span> and the actual <span class="menu">Width</span> for the transformer, the <span class="menu">Properties</span> view has these (depending on its type slightly differing) options:</p>
|
||||
<table summary="Transformer properties" border="0" cellspacing="0" cellpadding="2">
|
||||
<tr><td><span class="menu">Caps</span></td><td style="width:15px;"></td><td><i>Stroke only</i>. Defines the end caps of a line: <span class="menu">Butt</span>, <span class="menu">Square</span> or <span class="menu">Round</span>.</td></tr>
|
||||
<tr><td><span class="menu">Detect Orient.</span></td><td></td><td><i>Contour only</i>. Determines if the contour is to the inside or outside the path.</td></tr>
|
||||
<tr><td><span class="menu">Detect orient.</span></td><td></td><td><i>Contour only</i>. Determines if the contour is to the inside or outside the path.</td></tr>
|
||||
<tr><td><span class="menu">Joins</span></td><td></td><td>Defines how lines are joint at a point: <span class="menu">Miter</span>, <span class="menu">Round</span> or <span class="menu">Bevel</span>.</td></tr>
|
||||
<tr><td><span class="menu">Miter Limit</span></td><td></td><td>Only when the above <span class="menu">Joins</span> is set to "Miter" this setting influences the looks of the miter joint. </td></tr>
|
||||
<tr><td><span class="menu">Miter limit</span></td><td></td><td>Only when the above <span class="menu">Joins</span> is set to "Miter" this setting influences the looks of the miter joint. </td></tr>
|
||||
</table>
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -289,18 +289,18 @@ Of course you can move these indicators to change the gradient to your liking. Y
|
||||
<a href="#"><img src="../../images/up.png" style="border:none;float:right" alt="index" /></a>
|
||||
<a id="i-o-m-save" name="i-o-m-save">Saving an icon</a></h3>
|
||||
<p>There's your usual menu bar at the top, <span class="menu">File</span>, <span class="menu">Edit</span>, <span class="menu">Options</span>. The usage is pretty much self-explaining, so we'll only look at how to save your work.</p>
|
||||
<p><span class="menu">File | Save As...</span> will save in a special Icon-O-Matic format that retains additional information like the names of paths, shapes and styles. These will be stripped from the actual icon once you export it to save space. It's a good idea to back-up your work like this, because without named objects everything's named "<path>/<shape>/<style>" which makes specific changes tedious.</p>
|
||||
<p><span class="menu">File | Save as...</span> will save in a special Icon-O-Matic format that retains additional information like the names of paths, shapes and styles. These will be stripped from the actual icon once you export it to save space. It's a good idea to back-up your work like this, because without named objects everything's named "<path>/<shape>/<style>" which makes specific changes tedious.</p>
|
||||
|
||||
<p><span class="menu">File | Export As...</span> opens a familiar save panel with a file format pop-up menu at the bottom, offering these choices:</p>
|
||||
<p><span class="menu">File | Export as...</span> opens a familiar save panel with a file format pop-up menu at the bottom, offering these choices:</p>
|
||||
<table summary="file formats" border="0" cellspacing="0" cellpadding="2">
|
||||
<tr><td>HVIF</td><td style="width:15px;"></td><td>Haiku Vector Icon Format</td></tr>
|
||||
<tr><td>HVIF RDef</td><td></td><td>Saves as resource used by programmers</td></tr>
|
||||
<tr><td>HVIF Source Code</td><td></td><td>Saves as source code used by programmers</td></tr>
|
||||
<tr><td>HVIF source code</td><td></td><td>Saves as source code used by programmers</td></tr>
|
||||
<tr><td>SVG</td><td></td><td>Saves as SVG</td></tr>
|
||||
<tr><td>PNG</td><td></td><td>Saves as a 64px sized PNG</td></tr>
|
||||
<tr><td>PNG Set</td><td></td><td>Saves as 16, 32 and 64px sized PNGs</td></tr>
|
||||
<tr><td>BEOS:ICON Attribute</td><td></td><td>Choose a file and set its icon attribute directly</td></tr>
|
||||
<tr><td>META:ICON Attribute</td><td></td><td>Choose a file and attach the icon as mere meta data</td></tr>
|
||||
<tr><td>PNG set</td><td></td><td>Saves as 16, 32 and 64px sized PNGs</td></tr>
|
||||
<tr><td>BEOS:ICON attribute</td><td></td><td>Choose a file and set its icon attribute directly</td></tr>
|
||||
<tr><td>META:ICON attribute</td><td></td><td>Choose a file and attach the icon as mere meta data</td></tr>
|
||||
</table>
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -71,7 +71,7 @@ chainloader +1</pre></li>
|
||||
<img src="../images/apps-images/installer.png" alt="installer.png" />
|
||||
<p>In the first pop-up menu you choose the source for the installation. It can be a currently installed Haiku or can come from an install CD or USB drive, etc.<br />
|
||||
The second pop-up menu specifies the target for the installation. This target partition/volume will be completely overwritten and has to be set aside beforehand by a partitioning tool like GParted.</p>
|
||||
<p>Clicking the little expander widget will <i>Show Optional Packages</i>, if available, that you can choose to install in addition to the basic Haiku.</p>
|
||||
<p>Clicking the little expander widget will <i>Show optional packages</i>, if available, that you can choose to install in addition to the basic Haiku.</p>
|
||||
<p>You should do a last check if you really picked the right target before starting the installation process. Click on <span class="button">Setup partitions...</span> to open <a href="drivesetup.html">DriveSetup</a> and have a look at the naming and layout of the available volumes and partitions.</p>
|
||||
<p><span class="button">Begin</span> starts the installation procedure, which basically copies everything but the <span class="path">home/</span> and <span class="path">common/</span> folder onto the target volume and makes it bootable.</p>
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -65,19 +65,19 @@ They can also be moved with <span class="key">←</span> / <span class="key">→
|
||||
<p>You can move the mouse pointer pixel by pixel with <span class="key">OPT</span> <span class="key">←</span> / <span class="key">→</span> / <span class="key">↑</span> / <span class="key">↓</span>.</p>
|
||||
<p>Clicking on the pop-up menu gives you a number of options:</p>
|
||||
<table summary="options" border="0" cellpadding="2" cellspacing="0">
|
||||
<tr><td><span class="menu">Save Image</span></td><td><span class="key">ALT</span> <span class="key">S</span></td><td> </td><td>Saves the current display as a resource file.</td></tr>
|
||||
<tr><td><span class="menu">Copy Image</span></td><td><span class="key">ALT</span> <span class="key">C</span></td><td> </td><td>Copies the current display to the clipboard.</td></tr>
|
||||
<tr><td><span class="menu">Hide/Show Info</span></td><td><span class="key">ALT</span> <span class="key">T</span></td><td> </td><td>Toggles the display of all the additional information.</td></tr>
|
||||
<tr><td><span class="menu">Add a Crosshair</span></td><td><span class="key">ALT</span> <span class="key">H</span></td><td> </td><td>Adds a crosshair you can drag around. </td></tr>
|
||||
<tr><td><span class="menu">Remove a Crosshair</span></td><td><span class="key">ALT</span> <span class="key">SHIFT</span> <span class="key">H</span></td><td> </td><td>Removes the last added crosshair.</td></tr>
|
||||
<tr><td><span class="menu">Hide/Show Grid</span></td><td><span class="key">ALT</span> <span class="key">G</span></td><td> </td><td>Toggles the overlayed grid.</td></tr>
|
||||
<tr><td><span class="menu">Save image</span></td><td><span class="key">ALT</span> <span class="key">S</span></td><td> </td><td>Saves the current display as a resource file.</td></tr>
|
||||
<tr><td><span class="menu">Copy image</span></td><td><span class="key">ALT</span> <span class="key">C</span></td><td> </td><td>Copies the current display to the clipboard.</td></tr>
|
||||
<tr><td><span class="menu">Hide/Show info</span></td><td><span class="key">ALT</span> <span class="key">T</span></td><td> </td><td>Toggles the display of all the additional information.</td></tr>
|
||||
<tr><td><span class="menu">Add a crosshair</span></td><td><span class="key">ALT</span> <span class="key">H</span></td><td> </td><td>Adds a crosshair you can drag around. </td></tr>
|
||||
<tr><td><span class="menu">Remove a crosshair</span></td><td><span class="key">ALT</span> <span class="key">SHIFT</span> <span class="key">H</span></td><td> </td><td>Removes the last added crosshair.</td></tr>
|
||||
<tr><td><span class="menu">Hide/Show grid</span></td><td><span class="key">ALT</span> <span class="key">G</span></td><td> </td><td>Toggles the overlayed grid.</td></tr>
|
||||
<tr><td class="onelinetop"><span class="menu">Freeze/Unfreeze image</span></td><td><span class="key">ALT</span> <span class="key">F</span></td><td> </td><td>Stops/continues updating the magnification area.</td></tr>
|
||||
<tr><td><span class="menu">Stick Coordinates</span></td><td><span class="key">ALT</span> <span class="key">I</span></td><td> </td><td>Keeps updating the magnification area, but don't follow the mouse pointer any more.</td></tr>
|
||||
<tr><td><span class="menu">Make Square</span></td><td><span class="key">ALT</span> <span class="key">/</span></td><td> </td><td>Reverts back to a square display after resizing the window.</td></tr>
|
||||
<tr><td class="onelinetop"><span class="menu">Decrease Window Size</span></td><td><span class="key">ALT</span> <span class="key">-</span></td><td> </td><td>Shrinks the magnified area around the mouse pointer.</td></tr>
|
||||
<tr><td><span class="menu">Increase Window Size</span></td><td><span class="key">ALT</span> <span class="key">+</span></td><td> </td><td>Enlarges the magnified area around the mouse pointer.</td></tr>
|
||||
<tr><td><span class="menu">Decrease Pixel Size</span></td><td><span class="key">ALT</span> <span class="key">,</span></td><td> </td><td>Lowers magnification.</td></tr>
|
||||
<tr><td><span class="menu">Increase Pixel Size</span></td><td><span class="key">ALT</span> <span class="key">.</span></td><td> </td><td>Increases magnification.</td></tr>
|
||||
<tr><td><span class="menu">Stick coordinates</span></td><td><span class="key">ALT</span> <span class="key">I</span></td><td> </td><td>Keeps updating the magnification area, but don't follow the mouse pointer any more.</td></tr>
|
||||
<tr><td><span class="menu">Make square</span></td><td><span class="key">ALT</span> <span class="key">/</span></td><td> </td><td>Reverts back to a square display after resizing the window.</td></tr>
|
||||
<tr><td class="onelinetop"><span class="menu">Decrease window size</span></td><td><span class="key">ALT</span> <span class="key">-</span></td><td> </td><td>Shrinks the magnified area around the mouse pointer.</td></tr>
|
||||
<tr><td><span class="menu">Increase window size</span></td><td><span class="key">ALT</span> <span class="key">+</span></td><td> </td><td>Enlarges the magnified area around the mouse pointer.</td></tr>
|
||||
<tr><td><span class="menu">Decrease pixel size</span></td><td><span class="key">ALT</span> <span class="key">,</span></td><td> </td><td>Lowers magnification.</td></tr>
|
||||
<tr><td><span class="menu">Increase pixel size</span></td><td><span class="key">ALT</span> <span class="key">.</span></td><td> </td><td>Increases magnification.</td></tr>
|
||||
</table>
|
||||
|
||||
</div>
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -113,11 +113,11 @@ Both files can be created in the <span class="path">home/</span> folder and add
|
||||
<a id="hints" name="hints">Hints for working with the Terminal</a></h2>
|
||||
<ul><li><p>Dragging a file or folder from a Tracker window into the Terminal will insert its path at the location of the cursor. Dragging with the right mouse button offers additional actions in a context menu:</p>
|
||||
<table summary="layout" border="0" cellpadding="2" cellspacing="0">
|
||||
<tr><td><span class="menu">Insert Path</span></td><td> </td><td>Inserts the location of the file, same as drag&dropping with the left mouse button.</td></tr>
|
||||
<tr><td><span class="menu">Change Directory</span></td><td> </td><td>Changes to the folder of the dragged file.</td></tr>
|
||||
<tr><td><span class="menu">Create Link Here</span></td><td> </td><td>Creates a link to the dragged file in the current working directory of the Terminal.</td></tr>
|
||||
<tr><td><span class="menu">Move Here</span></td><td> </td><td>Moves the dragged file into the current working directory of the Terminal.</td></tr>
|
||||
<tr><td><span class="menu">Copy Here</span></td><td> </td><td>Copies the dragged file into the current working directory of the Terminal.</td></tr>
|
||||
<tr><td><span class="menu">Insert path</span></td><td> </td><td>Inserts the location of the file, same as drag&dropping with the left mouse button.</td></tr>
|
||||
<tr><td><span class="menu">Change directory</span></td><td> </td><td>Changes to the folder of the dragged file.</td></tr>
|
||||
<tr><td><span class="menu">Create link here</span></td><td> </td><td>Creates a link to the dragged file in the current working directory of the Terminal.</td></tr>
|
||||
<tr><td><span class="menu">Move here</span></td><td> </td><td>Moves the dragged file into the current working directory of the Terminal.</td></tr>
|
||||
<tr><td><span class="menu">Copy here</span></td><td> </td><td>Copies the dragged file into the current working directory of the Terminal.</td></tr>
|
||||
</table></li>
|
||||
<li><p>You can open any file with its preferred application with the command <span class="cli">open <i>[filename]</i></span>. This also works with the representation of the current ("<span class="cli">.</span>") and parent ("<span class="cli">..</span>") folder which then open in a Tracker window. So, to open the current working directory, you type:</p>
|
||||
<pre class="terminal">open .</pre>
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -69,15 +69,15 @@
|
||||
<p>A menu opens when you click on the Deskbar's top:</p>
|
||||
<img src="images/deskbar-images/deskbar.png" alt="deskbar.png" />
|
||||
<ul>
|
||||
<li><p><b>About This System...</b> - Shows some basic information of the system, licenses and the credits of the Haiku project.</p></li>
|
||||
<li><p><b>About this system...</b> - Shows some basic information of the system, licenses and the credits of the Haiku project.</p></li>
|
||||
|
||||
<li><p><b>Find...</b> - Opens the <a href="queries.html">Query</a> dialog.</p></li>
|
||||
<li><p><b>Show Replicants</b> - Shows/hides the little <a href="gui.html#replicants">Replicant</a> widget you use to drag it around, remove or access its context menu.</p></li>
|
||||
<li><p><b>Show replicants</b> - Shows/hides the little <a href="gui.html#replicants">Replicant</a> widget you use to drag it around, remove or access its context menu.</p></li>
|
||||
<li><p><b>Mount</b> - Offers the same options as when invoked by right-clicking the Desktop (see <a href="tracker.html#mounting-volumes">Mounting Volumes</a>).</p></li>
|
||||
<li><p><b>Deskbar Preferences...</b> - Opens a panel to configure the Deskbar (see below).</p></li>
|
||||
<li><p><b>Shutdown</b> - Offers options to either <span class="menu">Restart System</span> or <span class="menu">Power Off</span>.</p></li>
|
||||
<li><p><b>Recent Documents, Folders, Applications</b> - List of the last recently opened documents, folders and applications (see <span class="menu">Deskbar Preferences</span> below).</p></li>
|
||||
<li><p><b>Applications, Demos, Deskbar Applets, Preferences</b> - List of installed applications, demos, applets and preferences (see <span class="menu">Deskbar Preferences</span> below).</p></li>
|
||||
<li><p><b>Deskbar preferences...</b> - Opens a panel to configure the Deskbar (see below).</p></li>
|
||||
<li><p><b>Shutdown</b> - Offers options to either <span class="menu">Restart system</span> or <span class="menu">Power off</span>.</p></li>
|
||||
<li><p><b>Recent documents, folders, applications</b> - List of the last recently opened documents, folders and applications (see <span class="menu">Deskbar preferences</span> below).</p></li>
|
||||
<li><p><b>Applications, Demos, Deskbar applets, Preferences</b> - List of installed applications, demos, applets and preferences (see <span class="menu">Deskbar preferences</span> below).</p></li>
|
||||
</ul>
|
||||
|
||||
<h3>
|
||||
@@ -86,7 +86,7 @@
|
||||
<ul>
|
||||
<li><p><b>Menu</b><br />
|
||||
Here you can set the number of recent documents, folders and applications that are shown in their menu in the Deskbar, or if you want to see them at all.<br />
|
||||
The button <span class="button">Edit Menu...</span> opens the folder <span class="path">/boot/home/config/be/</span>. In it you'll find the files and folders that appear in the Deskbar, by default these are <span class="menu">Applications</span>, <span class="menu">Demos</span>, <span class="menu">Deskbar Applets</span>, and <span class="menu">Preferences</span>.<br />
|
||||
The button <span class="button">Edit menu...</span> opens the folder <span class="path">/boot/home/config/be/</span>. In it you'll find the files and folders that appear in the Deskbar, by default these are <span class="menu">Applications</span>, <span class="menu">Demos</span>, <span class="menu">Deskbar applets</span>, and <span class="menu">Preferences</span>.<br />
|
||||
You can delete or add entries like links to applications, documents or even queries by simply copying/deleting them to/from this folder.</p>
|
||||
<p>It's even easier to simply drag a file, folder or saved query and drop it where you want it into the Deskbar.</p></li>
|
||||
<li><p><b>Window</b></p>
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -57,16 +57,16 @@
|
||||
<img src="../images/desktop-applets-images/launchbox.png" alt="launchbox.png" />
|
||||
<p>All options are reached from the context menu:</p>
|
||||
<table summary="layout" border="0" cellpadding="2" cellspacing="0">
|
||||
<tr><td><span class="menu">Add Button Here</span></td><td style="width:10px;"> </td><td>Adds an empty button.</td></tr>
|
||||
<tr><td><span class="menu">Clear Button</span></td><td> </td><td>Empties a button.</td></tr>
|
||||
<tr><td><span class="menu">Remove Button</span></td><td> </td><td>Removes a button.</td></tr>
|
||||
<tr><td><span class="menu">Add button here</span></td><td style="width:10px;"> </td><td>Adds an empty button.</td></tr>
|
||||
<tr><td><span class="menu">Clear button</span></td><td> </td><td>Empties a button.</td></tr>
|
||||
<tr><td><span class="menu">Remove button</span></td><td> </td><td>Removes a button.</td></tr>
|
||||
<tr><td class="onelinetop"><span class="menu">Settings</span><br />
|
||||
<span class="menu">- Horizontal Layout</span><br />
|
||||
<span class="menu">- Horizontal layout</span><br />
|
||||
<span class="menu">- Icon size</span><br />
|
||||
<span class="menu">- Ignore Double-click</span><br />
|
||||
<span class="menu">- Show Window Border</span><br />
|
||||
<span class="menu">- Auto Raise</span><br />
|
||||
<span class="menu">- Show On All Workspaces</span></td><td> </td><td class="onelinetop"><br />
|
||||
<span class="menu">- Ignore double-click</span><br />
|
||||
<span class="menu">- Show window border</span><br />
|
||||
<span class="menu">- Auto raise</span><br />
|
||||
<span class="menu">- Show on all workspaces</span></td><td> </td><td class="onelinetop"><br />
|
||||
Aligns the buttons horizontally.<br />
|
||||
Sets the icon size between 16 and 64 pixel.<br />
|
||||
Launches the object only once, even when you (accidentally) double-click.<br />
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -55,9 +55,9 @@
|
||||
</table>
|
||||
<p><br /></p>
|
||||
<img src="../images/workspaces-images/workspaces.png" alt="workspaces.png" />
|
||||
<p>You find the Workspaces applet with the other <span class="menu">Desktop Applets</span> in the Deskbar. It shows a miniature version of all workspaces. There are several options available from the context menu of the applet's window, which are all pretty self-explaining.<br />
|
||||
<span class="menu">Change Workspace Count...</span> will open the <a href="../preferences/screen.html">Screen</a> preferences where you set the number of workspaces and their arrangement (how many rows and columns).</p>
|
||||
<p>Since the applet is a <a href="../gui.html#replicants">Replicant</a>, you can resize the window as desired and then drag&drop it by its handle onto the desktop (make sure <span class="menu">Show Replicants</span> is activated in the Deskbar menu). Hold <span class="key">SHIFT</span> while resizing to keep your screen's aspect ratio.</p>
|
||||
<p>You find the Workspaces applet with the other <span class="menu">Desktop applets</span> in the Deskbar. It shows a miniature version of all workspaces. There are several options available from the context menu of the applet's window, which are all pretty self-explaining.<br />
|
||||
<span class="menu">Change workspace count...</span> will open the <a href="../preferences/screen.html">Screen</a> preferences where you set the number of workspaces and their arrangement (how many rows and columns).</p>
|
||||
<p>Since the applet is a <a href="../gui.html#replicants">Replicant</a>, you can resize the window as desired and then drag&drop it by its handle onto the desktop (make sure <span class="menu">Show replicants</span> is activated in the Deskbar menu). Hold <span class="key">SHIFT</span> while resizing to keep your screen's aspect ratio.</p>
|
||||
|
||||
<h2>
|
||||
<a href="#"><img src="../../images/up.png" style="border:none;float:right" alt="index" /></a>
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -74,7 +74,7 @@ Instead, you put it into the mirrored hierarchy under <span class="path">/boot/c
|
||||
<p><span class="path">/boot/home/config/add-ons/Translators/</span><br />
|
||||
or<br />
|
||||
<span class="path">/boot/common/add-ons/Translators/</span></p>
|
||||
<p>This has another advantage: If the component you have installed messes things up (which is possible as you install hardware drivers like this, too) you are able to choose "<i>Disable User Add-Ons</i>" from the <a href="bootloader.html">Boot Loader</a> menu and are thus always able to boot without the offending component.</p>
|
||||
<p>This has another advantage: If the component you have installed messes things up (which is possible as you install hardware drivers like this, too) you are able to choose "<i>Disable user add-ons</i>" from the <a href="bootloader.html">Boot Loader</a> menu and are thus always able to boot without the offending component.</p>
|
||||
<p>Most of the time, however, you won't have to deal with these things at all, since every software that comes from a trusted source should include an installation routine that handles these things.<br />
|
||||
<!--
|
||||
If you do want to know more about how things tick in Haiku, have a look at this layout chart of the system folder:
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -72,26 +72,26 @@
|
||||
<a id="preferred-app" name="preferred-app">The Preferred Application</a></h3>
|
||||
<p>This pop-up menu shows a list of all applications that can handle this particular filetype. From here you can choose which program should open this specific file when it's double-clicked. You could, for example, change a HTML file's preferred application from the browser to a text editor while you're working on it. Every other HTML file still opens in the browser, only this particular one starts in your text editor.</p>
|
||||
|
||||
<p>The <span class="menu">Default Application</span> is the one that's set globally for that filetype. If you don't find the program you want to associate with this file in the pop-up menu, you'll again find the buttons <span class="button">Select...</span> and <span class="button">Same As...</span> which do the similar thing described under "The File Type" above.</p>
|
||||
<p>The <span class="menu">Default application</span> is the one that's set globally for that filetype. If you don't find the program you want to associate with this file in the pop-up menu, you'll again find the buttons <span class="button">Select...</span> and <span class="button">Same as...</span> which do the similar thing described under "The File Type" above.</p>
|
||||
|
||||
<h3>
|
||||
<a href="#"><img src="../images/up.png" style="border:none;float:right" alt="index" /></a>
|
||||
<a id="icon" name="icon">The Icon</a></h3>
|
||||
<p>If you're wondering why the icon well on the top right is empty: Icons are normally inherited from the system default for that filetype. You can open the <span class="app">Filetype Add-On</span> of a file that contains an icon and drag&drop it into your file's icon well. Or you double-click the icon well and create or edit your own icon. For more info on icons and how to create your own, see topic <a href="applications/icon-o-matic.html">Icon-O-Matic</a>.</p>
|
||||
<p>If you're wondering why the icon well on the top right is empty: Icons are normally inherited from the system default for that filetype. You can open the <span class="app">Filetype add-on</span> of a file that contains an icon and drag&drop it into your file's icon well. Or you double-click the icon well and create or edit your own icon. For more info on icons and how to create your own, see topic <a href="applications/icon-o-matic.html">Icon-O-Matic</a>.</p>
|
||||
|
||||
<h2>
|
||||
<a href="#"><img src="../images/up.png" style="border:none;float:right" alt="index" /></a>
|
||||
<a id="settings-apps" name="settings-apps">Special settings for applications</a></h2>
|
||||
<p>If you invoke the <span class="app">Filetype Add-On</span> on an executable (here: <span class="app">StyledEdit</span>), you'll get a different dialog:</p>
|
||||
<p>If you invoke the <span class="app">Filetype add-on</span> on an executable (here: <span class="app">StyledEdit</span>), you'll get a different dialog:</p>
|
||||
<img src="images/filetypes-images/filetype-addon-stylededit.png" alt="filetype-addon-stylededit.png" />
|
||||
<p>On top, you'll see, instead of a standardized MIME string, the unique application signature. With it, the system finds the program wherever it's installed.</p>
|
||||
<p>Below it are several flags, controlling the app's behaviour:</p>
|
||||
<table summary="layout" border="0" cellpadding="2" cellspacing="0">
|
||||
<tr><td><span class="menu">Single Launch</span></td><td> </td><td>Only one instance of the app can be running per executable file. If you have two copies of that app, however, they can run side by side.</td></tr>
|
||||
<tr><td><span class="menu">Multiple Launch</span></td><td> </td><td>Many instances of the app can run simultaneously.</td></tr>
|
||||
<tr><td class="onelinetop"><span class="menu">Exclusive Launch</span></td><td> </td><td>Really only one instance with that app's signature is allowed to run at a time.</td></tr>
|
||||
<tr><td><span class="menu">Args Only</span></td><td> </td><td>Indicates the app doesn't respond to messages.</td></tr>
|
||||
<tr><td><span class="menu">Background App</span></td><td> </td><td>The app won't appear in <a href="twitcher.html">Twitcher</a> or the list of running apps of the Deskbar.</td></tr>
|
||||
<tr><td><span class="menu">Single launch</span></td><td> </td><td>Only one instance of the app can be running per executable file. If you have two copies of that app, however, they can run side by side.</td></tr>
|
||||
<tr><td><span class="menu">Multiple launch</span></td><td> </td><td>Many instances of the app can run simultaneously.</td></tr>
|
||||
<tr><td class="onelinetop"><span class="menu">Exclusive launch</span></td><td> </td><td>Really only one instance with that app's signature is allowed to run at a time.</td></tr>
|
||||
<tr><td><span class="menu">Args only</span></td><td> </td><td>Indicates the app doesn't respond to messages.</td></tr>
|
||||
<tr><td><span class="menu">Background app</span></td><td> </td><td>The app won't appear in <a href="twitcher.html">Twitcher</a> or the list of running apps of the Deskbar.</td></tr>
|
||||
</table>
|
||||
<p>Then there's the list of supported filetypes. You can add (and remove) filetypes if you think the application can handle them. As a consequence, the app will appear in the menu for preferred applications or Tracker's <span class="menu">Open with...</span> context menu when you right-click on a file of that type.</p>
|
||||
<p>At the bottom are version and copyright information. Like the application signature, they are filled in by the app's author and shouldn't be altered.</p>
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -4,7 +4,7 @@
|
||||
<head>
|
||||
<!--
|
||||
*
|
||||
* Copyright 2008, Haiku. All rights reserved.
|
||||
* Copyright 2008-2011, Haiku. All rights reserved.
|
||||
* Distributed under the terms of the MIT License.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* Authors:
|
||||
@@ -64,7 +64,15 @@
|
||||
<li><p>The "zoom" button (or <span class="key">CTRL</span> <span class="key">ALT</span> <span class="key">Z</span>). In most applications, this will expand a window to maximum size. It doesn't have to, however. Tracker windows, for example, will resize to best fit the contents.</p></li>
|
||||
<li><p>The resize corner. Dragging anywhere else on a window's border will move the window.</p></li>
|
||||
</ol>
|
||||
<div class="box-info">While holding <span class="key">CTRL</span> <span class="key">ALT</span>, you can click anywhere into a window to move it with the left mouse button; the right mouse button sends it to the back.</div>
|
||||
|
||||
<h2>
|
||||
<a href="#"><img src="../images/up.png" style="border:none;float:right" alt="index" /></a>
|
||||
<a id="move-resize" name="move-resize">A quick way to move or resize windows</a></h2>
|
||||
<p>Moving and resizing windows is a large part of interacting with several concurrently running applications. Instead of aiming at the small yellow title tab or the even tinier window border, there's a more convenient way to move a window. Also, additionally to its small size, the resize corner has another limitation: It only allows resizing at and in the direction of the lower right corner.</p>
|
||||
<p>To address these issues, Haiku provides a neat solution using the window management key combo <span class="key">CTRL</span> <span class="key">ALT</span> and the mouse. See also chapter <a href="keyboard-shortcuts.html#general">Shortcuts and key combinations</a> for more shortcuts concerning window management.</p>
|
||||
<img src="images/gui-images/resizing.png" alt="resizing.png" />
|
||||
<p>Holding down <span class="key">CTRL</span> <span class="key">ALT</span> will highlight the window borders nearest to the mouse pointer. Move the mouse in the direction of another border to change the target. Click and dragging with the <i>right mouse button</i> will resize the window along the highlighted border(s).</p>
|
||||
<p>Hold down <span class="key">CTRL</span> <span class="key">ALT</span> and click and drag with the <i>left mouse button</i> anywhere in a window to move it around. A quick click with the <i>right mouse button</i> sends it to the back.</p>
|
||||
|
||||
<h2>
|
||||
<a href="#"><img src="../images/up.png" style="border:none;float:right" alt="index" /></a>
|
||||
@@ -93,16 +101,16 @@ You can enter parent folders with the pop-up menu above the file listing.</p>
|
||||
<a id="favorites-recent" name="favorites-recent">Favorites and recent folders</a></h3>
|
||||
<p>The <span class="menu">Favorites</span> menu in open and save panels provides recently visited folders and favorite locations that you can set up yourself. As indicated by the little arrow, you can also use these locations to navigate further down the hierarchy via submenus.</p>
|
||||
<img src="images/gui-images/favorites.png" alt="favorites.png" />
|
||||
<p>To add a Favorite, you simply navigate to your destination and choose <span class="menu">Favorites | Add Current Folder</span>. From now on it will appear in every open/save panel. To remove a Favorite, choose <span class="menu">Favorites | Configure Favorites...</span> and delete its entry.<br />
|
||||
<p>To add a Favorite, you simply navigate to your destination and choose <span class="menu">Favorites | Add current folder</span>. From now on it will appear in every open/save panel. To remove a Favorite, choose <span class="menu">Favorites | Configure favorites...</span> and delete its entry.<br />
|
||||
All Favorites are kept in <span class="path">/boot/home/config/settings/Tracker/Go/</span>. So you might as well add and remove links to files and folders there directly.</p>
|
||||
|
||||
<h2>
|
||||
<a href="#"><img src="../images/up.png" style="border:none;float:right" alt="index" /></a>
|
||||
<a id="replicants" name="replicants">Replicants</a></h2>
|
||||
<p>Replicants are small self-contained parts of applications that can be integrated into other programs. Provided Deskbar's option to <span class="menu">Show Replicants</span> is activated, you'll recognize a replicantable part of an application by its small handle, normally in the bottom right corner:</p>
|
||||
<p>Replicants are small self-contained parts of applications that can be integrated into other programs. Provided Deskbar's option to <span class="menu">Show replicants</span> is activated, you'll recognize a replicantable part of an application by its small handle, normally in the bottom right corner:</p>
|
||||
<img src="../images/gui-images/replicant.png" alt="replicant.png" />
|
||||
<p>The most prominent place that accepts Replicants is the Desktop: You simply drag&drop the little handle onto it. From now on it's part of the Desktop and the Replicant's originating app doesn't have to be started for it to work.<br />
|
||||
A right-click on a Replicant handle offers a context menu to show the originating app's <span class="menu">About</span> window and to <span class="menu">Remove Replicant</span>.</p>
|
||||
<p>The most prominent place that accepts Replicants is the Desktop: You simply drag & drop the little handle onto it. From now on it's part of the Desktop and the Replicant's originating app doesn't have to be started for it to work.<br />
|
||||
A right-click on a Replicant handle offers a context menu to show the originating app's <span class="menu">About</span> window and to <span class="menu">Remove replicant</span>.</p>
|
||||
<div class="box-info">Should you experience difficulties with a Replicant on the Desktop and just can't get rid of it, delete <span class="path">~/config/settings/Tracker/tracker_shelf</span>. Unfortunately, this will remove <i>all</i> Replicants from the Desktop.</div>
|
||||
<p>Examples for replicatable applications are the graphs of the <a href="applications/activitymonitor.html">ActivityMonitor</a>, the <a href="workspaces.html">Workspaces applet</a> or <a href="applications/deskcalc.html">DeskCalc</a>.</p>
|
||||
</div>
|
||||
|
||||
|
After Width: | Height: | Size: 9.0 KiB |
|
After Width: | Height: | Size: 7.5 KiB |
|
After Width: | Height: | Size: 6.1 KiB |
|
After Width: | Height: | Size: 5.3 KiB |
|
After Width: | Height: | Size: 8.9 KiB |
@@ -4,7 +4,7 @@
|
||||
<head>
|
||||
<!--
|
||||
*
|
||||
* Copyright 2008-2010, Haiku. All rights reserved.
|
||||
* Copyright 2008-2011, Haiku. All rights reserved.
|
||||
* Distributed under the terms of the MIT License.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* Authors:
|
||||
@@ -61,17 +61,20 @@
|
||||
<table summary="shortcuts" border="0" cellspacing="0" cellpadding="4">
|
||||
<tr><td><span class="key">ALT</span> <span class="key">Fx</span></td><td style="width:15px;"></td><td>Switches to <a href="workspaces.html">Workspace</a> X (<span class="key">Fx</span> is the function key corresponding to that workspace). Take the active window with you by adding <span class="key">SHIFT</span></td></tr>
|
||||
<tr><td class="onelinetop"><span class="key">CTRL</span> <span class="key">ALT</span> <span class="key">←</span> / <span class="key">→</span> / <span class="key">↑</span> / <span class="key">↓</span></td><td></td><td>Navigates spatially the rows/columns of the available workspaces. Add <span class="key">SHIFT</span> to take the active window with you.</td></tr>
|
||||
<tr><td><span class="key">CTRL</span> <span class="key">ALT</span> + left mouse</td><td></td><td>Click and drag with left mouse button to move a window (see chapter <a href="gui.html#move-resize">GUI</a>).</td></tr>
|
||||
<tr><td><span class="key">CTRL</span> <span class="key">ALT</span> + right mouse</td><td></td><td>Click and drag with right mouse button to resize a window (see chapter <a href="gui.html#move-resize">GUI</a>).</td></tr>
|
||||
<tr><td><span class="key">CTRL</span> <span class="key">ALT</span> <span class="key">Z</span></td><td></td><td>Zooms a window to an alternative size (maximum size for most applications).</td></tr>
|
||||
<tr><td><span class="key">CTRL</span> <span class="key">ALT</span> <span class="key">M</span></td><td></td><td>Minimizes the active window.</td></tr>
|
||||
<tr><td><span class="key">CTRL</span> <span class="key">ALT</span> <span class="key">H</span></td><td></td><td>Hides (minimizes) all windows of the active application.</td></tr>
|
||||
<tr><td><span class="key">CTRL</span> <span class="key">ALT</span> <span class="key">F</span></td><td></td><td>Pulls the active window to the front (only applicable with the mouse setting <a href="preferences/mouse.html">Focus Follows Mouse</a>).</td></tr>
|
||||
<tr><td><span class="key">CTRL</span> <span class="key">ALT</span> <span class="key">B</span></td><td></td><td>Sends the active window to the back. </td></tr>
|
||||
<tr><td><span class="key">CTRL</span> <span class="key">TAB</span></td><td></td><td>Hold down to bring up the <a href="twitcher.html">Twitcher</a>.</td></tr>
|
||||
<tr><td><span class="key">CTRL</span> <span class="key">ALT</span> <span class="key">DEL</span></td><td></td><td>Opens the <a href="teammonitor.html">Team Monitor</a>.</td></tr>
|
||||
<tr><td><span class="key">ALT</span> <span class="key">ESC</span></td><td></td><td>Enters the menu bar (leave with <span class="key">ESC</span>).</td></tr>
|
||||
<tr><td><span class="key">ALT</span> <span class="key">C</span></td><td></td><td>Copies the selection to the clipboard.</td></tr>
|
||||
<tr><td><span class="key">ALT</span> <span class="key">X</span></td><td></td><td>Cuts the selection to the clipboard.</td></tr>
|
||||
<tr><td><span class="key">ALT</span> <span class="key">V</span></td><td></td><td>Pastes the clipboard's contents.</td></tr>
|
||||
<tr><td><span class="key">ALT</span> <span class="key">W</span></td><td></td><td>Closes the active window.</td></tr><tr><td><span class="key">CTRL</span> <span class="key">ALT</span> <span class="key">Z</span></td><td></td><td>Zooms a window to an alternative size (maximum size for most applications).</td></tr>
|
||||
<tr><td><span class="key">CTRL</span> <span class="key">ALT</span> <span class="key">M</span></td><td></td><td>Minimizes the active window.</td></tr>
|
||||
<tr><td><span class="key">CTRL</span> <span class="key">ALT</span> <span class="key">H</span></td><td></td><td>Hides (minimizes) all windows of the active application.</td></tr>
|
||||
<tr><td><span class="key">CTRL</span> <span class="key">ALT</span> <span class="key">F</span></td><td></td><td>Pulls the active window to the front (only applicable with the mouse setting <a href="preferences/mouse.html">Focus Follows Mouse</a>).</td></tr>
|
||||
<tr><td><span class="key">CTRL</span> <span class="key">ALT</span> <span class="key">B</span></td><td></td><td>Sends the active window to the back. </td></tr>
|
||||
<tr><td><span class="key">ALT</span> <span class="key">W</span></td><td></td><td>Closes the active window.</td></tr>
|
||||
<tr><td><span class="key">ALT</span> <span class="key">Q</span></td><td></td><td>Quits an application.</td></tr>
|
||||
<tr><td><span class="key">PRINT</span></td><td style="width:15px;"></td><td>Takes a screenshot with zero delay and launches the <a href="applications/screenshot.html">Screenshot</a> panel.</td></tr>
|
||||
<tr><td class="onelinetop"><span class="key">SHIFT</span> <span class="key">PRINT</span></td><td></td><td>Takes a screenshot silently (without opening the panel), while still respecting the last used settings.</td></tr>
|
||||
@@ -122,7 +125,8 @@ are stored in the file <span class="path">~/.bash_history</span>. Press <span cl
|
||||
<tr><td><span class="key">ALT</span></td><td></td><td>Adds or removes the item you're clicking on from the selection.</td></tr>
|
||||
</table>
|
||||
<p>In a Tracker window, if you just start typing, Tracker scrolls to and selects the file that best fits your incremental search. If there's no file starting with your typed letters, files that contain the search string anywhere in their name or other displayed attributes are selected. This search is <i>not</i> case-sensitive.<br />
|
||||
The letters you type appear at the bottom-left, where normally the number of items is listed. After a second it reverts back and you could start a new incremental search.</p>
|
||||
The letters you type appear at the bottom-left, where normally the number of items is listed. After a second it reverts back and you could start a new incremental search.<br />
|
||||
Instead of jumping to the first occurrence of your search string, Tracker can be configured to filter out all non-matching files. See the topic on <a href="tracker.html#tracker-preferences">type-ahead filtering</a>.</p>
|
||||
|
||||
</div>
|
||||
</div>
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -70,10 +70,10 @@
|
||||
<h3>
|
||||
<a href="#"><img src="../../images/up.png" style="border:none;float:right" alt="index" /></a>
|
||||
Glyph hinting</h3>
|
||||
<p>An activated <span class="menu">Glyph hinting</span> aligns all letters in such a way that their vertical and horizontal edges rest exactly between two pixels. The result is a perfect contrast, especially when dealing with black on white. Text appears crisper. There's also a setting for <span class="menu">Monospaced Fonts Only</span> that's especially helpful with low resolution devices like netbooks. Small fonts can look pretty bad when hinting is turned on, but with this setting you still have the advantage of hinting for text editors and Terminal.</p>
|
||||
<p>An activated <span class="menu">Glyph hinting</span> aligns all letters in such a way that their vertical and horizontal edges rest exactly between two pixels. The result is a perfect contrast, especially when dealing with black on white. Text appears crisper. There's also a setting for <span class="menu">Monospaced fonts only</span> that's especially helpful with low resolution devices like netbooks. Small fonts can look pretty bad when hinting is turned on, but with this setting you still have the advantage of hinting for text editors and Terminal.</p>
|
||||
<p>See the difference hinting makes with these magnified screenshots:</p>
|
||||
<table summary="layout" border="0" cellspacing="0" cellpadding="2">
|
||||
<tr><td style="text-align:center; font-style:italic"><img src="../../images/prefs-images/appearance-glyph-off.png" alt="appearance-glyph-off.png" /><br />Hinting: off</td><td style="width:15px;"></td><td style="text-align:center; font-style:italic"><img src="../../images/prefs-images/appearance-glyph-on.png" alt="appearance-glyph-on.png" /><br />Hinting: on</td></tr>
|
||||
<tr><td style="text-align:center; font-style:italic"><img src="../images/prefs-images/appearance-glyph-off.png" alt="appearance-glyph-off.png" /><br />Hinting: off</td><td style="width:15px;"></td><td style="text-align:center; font-style:italic"><img src="../images/prefs-images/appearance-glyph-on.png" alt="appearance-glyph-on.png" /><br />Hinting: on</td></tr>
|
||||
</table>
|
||||
<p>It should be pointed out that all the <span class="app">Magnify</span> windows on this page are of course rendered themselves with the different options as well. So, you get a real world impression of the settings by comparing, for example, the bold yellow tab title or the text "33 x 15 @ 8 pixels/pixel".</p>
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -85,13 +85,13 @@ Antialiasing type</h3>
|
||||
<span class="menu">LCD subpixel</span> does an even better job, especially with (high resolution) LCD monitors. Instead of the intensity of a pixel, it changes its color which moves an edge by a fraction of a pixel, because LCD displays produce every pixel with a red, green and blue component.</p>
|
||||
<p>Again, the two different methods with magnified screenshots:</p>
|
||||
<table summary="layout" border="0" cellspacing="0" cellpadding="2">
|
||||
<tr><td style="text-align:center; font-style:italic"><img src="../../images/prefs-images/appearance-glyph-off.png" alt="appearance-glyph-off.png" /><br />Grayscale, Hinting: off</td><td style="width:15px;"></td><td style="text-align:center; font-style:italic"><img src="../../images/prefs-images/appearance-subpixel.png" alt="appearance-subpixel.png" /><br />LCD subpixel, Hinting: off</td></tr>
|
||||
<tr><td style="text-align:center; font-style:italic"><img src="../images/prefs-images/appearance-glyph-off.png" alt="appearance-glyph-off.png" /><br />Grayscale, Hinting: off</td><td style="width:15px;"></td><td style="text-align:center; font-style:italic"><img src="../images/prefs-images/appearance-subpixel.png" alt="appearance-subpixel.png" /><br />LCD subpixel, Hinting: off</td></tr>
|
||||
</table>
|
||||
<p>Subpixel based antialiasing adds a slight colored shine to objects. Something not everyone tolerates. In Haiku you can mix the two antialiasing methods and find the right setting for you by using a slider.</p>
|
||||
<div class="box-info">The subpixel based antialiasing in combination with the glyph hinting is subject of a software patent and is therefore not available by default. Depending on where in the world you live, you may get an unlocked version. Sorry about that. Talk with your representative.</div>
|
||||
<p>If you do activate hinting plus LCD subpixel rendering by changing the source and recompiling, this is how it looks compared to hinting with Grayscale:</p>
|
||||
<table summary="layout" border="0" cellspacing="0" cellpadding="2">
|
||||
<tr><td style="text-align:center; font-style:italic"><img src="../../images/prefs-images/appearance-glyph-on.png" alt="appearance-glyph-on.png" /><br />Grayscale, Hinting: on</td><td style="width:15px;"></td><td style="text-align:center; font-style:italic"><img src="../../images/prefs-images/appearance-glyph-on-subpixel.png" alt="appearance-glyph-on-subpixel.png" /><br />LCD subpixel, Hinting: on</td></tr>
|
||||
<tr><td style="text-align:center; font-style:italic"><img src="../images/prefs-images/appearance-glyph-on.png" alt="appearance-glyph-on.png" /><br />Grayscale, Hinting: on</td><td style="width:15px;"></td><td style="text-align:center; font-style:italic"><img src="../images/prefs-images/appearance-glyph-on-subpixel.png" alt="appearance-glyph-on-subpixel.png" /><br />LCD subpixel, Hinting: on</td></tr>
|
||||
</table>
|
||||
<p><br /></p>
|
||||
<p>At the bottom of the panel are two buttons:</p>
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -61,25 +61,25 @@
|
||||
<p>Depending on its capabilities, each Translator offers different settings. At least you'll get an <span class="button">Info...</span> button that opens a window with the credits and the installation path.<br />
|
||||
The following table gives an overview of the default Translators and their most useful options.</p>
|
||||
<table summary="translators" border="0" cellpadding="2" cellspacing="0">
|
||||
<tr><td><span class="menu">BMP Images</span></td><td>24bit, uncompressed, no transparency</td></tr>
|
||||
<tr><td><span class="menu">EXR Images</span></td><td><acronym title="Industrial Light & Magic">ILM</acronym>'s high dynamic-range (HDR) format</td></tr>
|
||||
<tr><td><span class="menu">GIF Images</span></td><td>8bit, lossless compression, transparency<br />
|
||||
<tr><td><span class="menu">BMP images</span></td><td>24bit, uncompressed, no transparency</td></tr>
|
||||
<tr><td><span class="menu">EXR images</span></td><td><acronym title="Industrial Light & Magic">ILM</acronym>'s high dynamic-range (HDR) format</td></tr>
|
||||
<tr><td><span class="menu">GIF images</span></td><td>8bit, lossless compression, transparency<br />
|
||||
You can reduce the filesize by limiting the number of used colors and the palette.<br />
|
||||
You can write images with transparency, either by automatically using the alpha channel or by setting the RGB value that will be transparent by hand.</td></tr>
|
||||
<tr><td><span class="menu">JPEG2000 Images</span></td><td>24bit, compressed, no transparency<br />
|
||||
<tr><td><span class="menu">JPEG2000 images</span></td><td>24bit, compressed, no transparency<br />
|
||||
Here, you normally only care about the output quality.</td></tr>
|
||||
<tr><td><span class="menu">JPEG Images</span></td><td>24bit, compressed, no transparency<br />
|
||||
<tr><td><span class="menu">JPEG images</span></td><td>24bit, compressed, no transparency<br />
|
||||
Besides the output quality you can also set a smoothing that will lessen compression artefacts but can blur the picture a little.</td></tr>
|
||||
<tr><td><span class="menu">PCX Images</span></td><td>24bit, uncompressed, no transparency, PC Paintbrush Exchange format</td></tr>
|
||||
<tr><td><span class="menu">PNG Images</span></td><td>32bit, lossless compression, transparency</td></tr>
|
||||
<tr><td><span class="menu">PPM Images</span></td><td>24bit, uncompressed, no transparency, Portable PixMap format</td></tr>
|
||||
<tr><td><span class="menu">RAW Images</span></td><td>up to 48bit, uncompressed, no transparency</td></tr>
|
||||
<tr><td><span class="menu">RTF Text Files</span></td><td>Formatted text</td></tr>
|
||||
<tr><td><span class="menu">SGI Images</span></td><td>24bit, optional lossless compression, transparency</td></tr>
|
||||
<tr><td><span class="menu">StyledEdit Files</span></td><td>Formatted text</td></tr>
|
||||
<tr><td><span class="menu">TGA Images</span></td><td>32bit, optional lossless compression, transparency</td></tr>
|
||||
<tr><td><span class="menu">TIFF Images</span></td><td>24bit, optional lossless compression, layers, transparency</td></tr>
|
||||
<tr><td class="onelinetop"><span class="menu">WonderBrush Images</span></td><td>32bit, layers, transparency, vector/pixel data</td></tr>
|
||||
<tr><td><span class="menu">PCX images</span></td><td>24bit, uncompressed, no transparency, PC Paintbrush Exchange format</td></tr>
|
||||
<tr><td><span class="menu">PNG images</span></td><td>32bit, lossless compression, transparency</td></tr>
|
||||
<tr><td><span class="menu">PPM images</span></td><td>24bit, uncompressed, no transparency, Portable PixMap format</td></tr>
|
||||
<tr><td><span class="menu">RAW images</span></td><td>up to 48bit, uncompressed, no transparency</td></tr>
|
||||
<tr><td><span class="menu">RTF text files</span></td><td>Formatted text</td></tr>
|
||||
<tr><td><span class="menu">SGI images</span></td><td>24bit, optional lossless compression, transparency</td></tr>
|
||||
<tr><td><span class="menu">StyledEdit files</span></td><td>Formatted text</td></tr>
|
||||
<tr><td><span class="menu">TGA images</span></td><td>32bit, optional lossless compression, transparency</td></tr>
|
||||
<tr><td><span class="menu">TIFF images</span></td><td>24bit, optional lossless compression, layers, transparency</td></tr>
|
||||
<tr><td class="onelinetop"><span class="menu">WonderBrush images</span></td><td>32bit, layers, transparency, vector/pixel data</td></tr>
|
||||
</table>
|
||||
<p><br /></p>
|
||||
<div class="box-info">Screenshots, charts, black&white drawings and other images with few used colors, as well as small pictures are best saved as GIF (up to 256 colors) or PNG (millions of colors). JPEG, for example, introduces compression artefacts without gain in smaller filesize.</div>
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -74,8 +74,8 @@ The configuration is done in the E-Mail preference panel.</p>
|
||||
<p>Let's go through the process of setting up an e-mail account.<br />
|
||||
You start by clicking the <span class="button">Add</span> button to create a new, unnamed account. This opens a panel where you fill in your account info:</p>
|
||||
<img src="../images/prefs-images/e-mail-new-account.png" alt="e-mail-new-account.png" />
|
||||
<p>First, declare the <i>Account Type</i> which is either <span class="menu">Receive Mail Only</span>, <span class="menu">Send Mail Only</span>, or the most usual type, <span class="menu">Send and Receive Mail</span>. Then you set how you get your mail, via <span class="menu">POP3</span> or <span class="menu">IMAP</span>.</p>
|
||||
<p>Now you enter your <i>E-mail Address</i>, <i>Login Name</i> and <i>Password</i>, give an <i>Account Name</i> under which it will be known under Haiku and your <i>Real Name</i>.</p>
|
||||
<p>First, declare the <i>Account type</i> which is either <span class="menu">Receive mail only</span>, <span class="menu">Send mail only</span>, or the most usual type, <span class="menu">Send and receive mail</span>. Then you set how you get your mail, via <span class="menu">POP3</span> or <span class="menu">IMAP</span>.</p>
|
||||
<p>Now you enter your <i>E-mail address</i>, <i>Login name</i> and <i>Password</i>, give an <i>Account name</i> under which it will be known under Haiku and your <i>Real name</i>.</p>
|
||||
<p>If your account is from a major e-mail provider, Haiku already knows all technical details like server IP addresses and the following information is already filled in automatically. If that is not the case, just follow this guide and fill in the details to your e-mail account accordingly.</p>
|
||||
|
||||
<h2>
|
||||
@@ -84,11 +84,11 @@ You start by clicking the <span class="button">Add</span> button to create a new
|
||||
<p>Click on <span class="menu">Incoming</span> under your account's name to set up how e-mails are received.</p>
|
||||
<img src="../images/prefs-images/e-mail-in.png" alt="e-mail-in.png" />
|
||||
<p>From the pop-up menu you choose the protocol used by your provider. <span class="menu">IMAP</span> and <span class="menu">POP3</span> are supported.</p>
|
||||
<p>Next is the <span class="menu">Mail Server</span> address for incoming mails. If your provider needs you to log into a specific port, you add that to the address, separated by a colon. For example, <tt>pop.your-provider.org:1400</tt>.</p>
|
||||
<p>Then you enter your login information, <i>Username</i> and <i>Password</i>, and if necessary change the <i>Login Type</i> from the default <span class="menu">Plain Text</span> to <span class="menu">APOP</span> for authentication.</p>
|
||||
<p>Next is the <span class="menu">Mail server</span> address for incoming mails. If your provider needs you to log into a specific port, you add that to the address, separated by a colon. For example, <tt>pop.your-provider.org:1400</tt>.</p>
|
||||
<p>Then you enter your login information, <i>Username</i> and <i>Password</i>, and if necessary change the <i>Login type</i> from the default <span class="menu">Plain text</span> to <span class="menu">APOP</span> for authentication.</p>
|
||||
<p>If you use <i>POP3</i> and retrieve mails of this account from different computers, you may want to activate the option to <span class="menu">Leave mail on server</span> and only <span class="menu">Remove mail from server when deleted</span> locally.</p>
|
||||
<p>If you use <i>IMAP</i> instead, you have the option to <span class="menu">Remove mail from server when deleted</span> locally. You can specify a <span class="menu">Top Mailbox Folder</span> to only synchronize with a specific folder and its subfolders.</p>
|
||||
<p>The <span class="menu">New Mail Notification</span> offers different methods to announce the arrival of new mail. Try different settings to see what works best for you.</p>
|
||||
<p>If you use <i>IMAP</i> instead, you have the option to <span class="menu">Remove mail from server when deleted</span> locally. You can specify a <span class="menu">Top mailbox folder</span> to only synchronize with a specific folder and its subfolders.</p>
|
||||
<p>The <span class="menu">New mail notification</span> offers different methods to announce the arrival of new mail. Try different settings to see what works best for you.</p>
|
||||
<p>You can change the <i>Location</i> of your inbox (default: <span class="path">/boot/home/mail/in/</span>), which is useful if you'd like to separate the mails from different accounts into their own folders. However, queries let you sort things out just as well.</p>
|
||||
<p>Last on this page, you can opt to only <span class="menu">Partially download messages</span> that are larger than a certain size. This will only get the header and you can decide if you want to download the rest of the message plus possible attachments after seeing the subject and who sent it. Useful if you have a slow connection.</p>
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -104,8 +104,8 @@ You start by clicking the <span class="button">Add</span> button to create a new
|
||||
<h2>
|
||||
<a href="#"><img src="../../images/up.png" style="border:none;float:right" alt="index" /></a>
|
||||
<a id="filters" name="filters">Setting up e-mail filters</a></h2>
|
||||
<p>If you want to filter your incoming email, you click on <span class="menu">E-Mail Filters</span> under your account's name to set up automatic sorting. You can add any number of filters that are applied one after the other. You can rearrange them by drag&dropping them to their new position.<br />
|
||||
Besides the <span class="menu">R5 Daemon Filter</span> that's used for backward compatibility, there are two other <span class="menu">Incoming Mail Filters</span> you can add.</p>
|
||||
<p>If you want to filter your incoming email, you click on <span class="menu">E-Mail filters</span> under your account's name to set up automatic sorting. You can add any number of filters that are applied one after the other. You can rearrange them by drag&dropping them to their new position.<br />
|
||||
Besides the <span class="menu">R5 daemon filter</span> that's used for backward compatibility, there are two other <span class="menu">Incoming mail filters</span> you can add.</p>
|
||||
|
||||
<h3>
|
||||
<a href="#"><img src="../../images/up.png" style="border:none;float:right" alt="index" /></a>
|
||||
@@ -114,7 +114,7 @@ Spam Filter</h3>
|
||||
<p>The spam filter uses statistical methods to classify a mail as unwanted spam. It assigns a value between 0 and 1 to it and you can decide what are the limits for a genuine mail and what will be considered spam.<br />
|
||||
You can have that spam rating added to the start of the subject.<br />
|
||||
Also, the spam filter can learn from all incoming e-mail. Of course, you'll have to teach it by sorting out the false positives, mails that were mistakenly marked as spam. You'll find more on that when we discuss the application <span class="app">Mail</span>.</p>
|
||||
<p>Together with the following <span class="menu">Match Header</span> filter, you're able to automatically sort out detected spam mails.</p>
|
||||
<p>Together with the following <span class="menu">Match header</span> filter, you're able to automatically sort out detected spam mails.</p>
|
||||
|
||||
<h3>
|
||||
<a href="#"><img src="../../images/up.png" style="border:none;float:right" alt="index" /></a>
|
||||
@@ -129,7 +129,7 @@ With the first text field you specify which header to check against. These are a
|
||||
<td>the e-mail address of the sender</td></tr>
|
||||
<tr><td><span class="menu">To</span></td><td> </td>
|
||||
<td>your e-mail address (different for each e-mail account)</td></tr>
|
||||
<tr><td><span class="menu">Reply To</span></td><td> </td>
|
||||
<tr><td><span class="menu">Reply to</span></td><td> </td>
|
||||
<td>the e-mail address replies are sent to</td></tr>
|
||||
<tr><td><span class="menu">When</span></td><td> </td>
|
||||
<td>the date and time the mail was received</td></tr>
|
||||
@@ -145,9 +145,9 @@ With the first text field you specify which header to check against. These are a
|
||||
<td>is set by the sender's e-mail program (e.g. "urgent")</td></tr>
|
||||
<tr><td><span class="menu">Thread</span></td><td> </td>
|
||||
<td>essentially the same as "Subject", but without things like Re: or Fwd:</td></tr>
|
||||
<tr><td><span class="menu">Classification Group</span></td><td> </td>
|
||||
<tr><td><span class="menu">Classification group</span></td><td> </td>
|
||||
<td>depending on what the spam filter classified it as, this will either be empty (if uncertain) or contain the word "Genuine" or "Spam"</td></tr>
|
||||
<tr><td><span class="menu">Spam/Genuine Estimate</span></td><td> </td>
|
||||
<tr><td><span class="menu">Spam/Genuine estimate</span></td><td> </td>
|
||||
<td>this is a numerical estimate that the spam filter assigned to the e-mail. They are shown in scientific notation, where 1.065e-12 translates to 1.065 divided by 10 to the 12th power, which in this case translates to 0.000000000001065.</td></tr>
|
||||
</table>
|
||||
<p>The second text field holds your search pattern. It accepts <a href="http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Regular_expression" class="external free" title="Wikipedia: Regular expression" rel="nofollow">regular expressions</a> which gives it great flexibility, while unfortunately complicating things a bit. Read up on it a bit, it's well worth it and simple search patterns aren't <i>that</i> complicated at all.</p>
|
||||
@@ -164,13 +164,13 @@ Outgoing Mail Filters</h3>
|
||||
<a id="settings" name="settings">Setting up the Mail Service</a></h2>
|
||||
<p>Now that your incoming and outgoing mail servers (and maybe some filters, too), are configured, you have to tell the Mail Service that does all the actual checking and fetching how to do its job.</p>
|
||||
<img src="../images/prefs-images/e-mail-settings.png" alt="e-mail-settings.png" />
|
||||
<p>Under <i>Mail Checking</i> you configure the interval at which the account's mail server is probed for new mail.<br />
|
||||
If you're on a dial-up connection, you may want to do that <span class="menu">Only When Dial-Up is Connected</span> and also <span class="menu">Schedule Outgoing Mail When Dial-Up is Disconnected</span> to avoid dialing automatically in regularly only to check for mail.</p>
|
||||
<p>The Mail Service has a status window which you can set to show up <span class="menu">Never</span>, <span class="menu">While Sending</span>, <span class="menu">While Sending and Receiving</span> or <span class="menu">Always</span>.</p>
|
||||
<p>Make sure to <span class="menu">Start Mail Services on Startup</span> or there will be no mail_daemon running to do your bidding...</p>
|
||||
<p>Under <i>Mail checking</i> you configure the interval at which the account's mail server is probed for new mail.<br />
|
||||
If you're on a dial-up connection, you may want to do that <span class="menu">Only when dial-up is connected</span> and also <span class="menu">Schedule outgoing mail when dial-up is disconnected</span> to avoid dialing automatically in regularly only to check for mail.</p>
|
||||
<p>The Mail Service has a status window which you can set to show up <span class="menu">Never</span>, <span class="menu">While sending</span>, <span class="menu">While sending and receiving</span> or <span class="menu">Always</span>.</p>
|
||||
<p>Make sure to <span class="menu">Start mail services on startup</span> or there will be no mail_daemon running to do your bidding...</p>
|
||||
<img src="../images/prefs-images/e-mail-mailbox.png" alt="e-mail-mailbox.png" />
|
||||
<p><span class="menu">Edit Mailbox Menu...</span> will open the folder <span class="path">/boot/home/config/Mail/Menu Links/</span>. All folders or queries (!) or their links put into this folder will appear in the context menu of the mailbox icon of the Mail Services in the Deskbar tray.</p>
|
||||
<p>From that menu, you can also <span class="menu">Create New Message...</span>, <span class="menu">Check For Mail Now</span> or <span class="menu">Edit Preferences...</span>.</p>
|
||||
<p><span class="menu">Edit mailbox menu...</span> will open the folder <span class="path">/boot/home/config/Mail/Menu Links/</span>. All folders or queries (!) or their links put into this folder will appear in the context menu of the mailbox icon of the Mail Services in the Deskbar tray.</p>
|
||||
<p>From that menu, you can also <span class="menu">Create new message...</span>, <span class="menu">Check for mail now</span> or <span class="menu">Edit preferences...</span>.</p>
|
||||
<p>The mailbox icon itself shows if there are unread messages (status "New") when there are envelopes inside.</p>
|
||||
|
||||
</div>
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -63,8 +63,8 @@ Thus, the Keymap preferences are not only for configuring your local keymap, but
|
||||
<p>Then there are the keys that are marked with a blue background. These keys are called <i>Dead Keys</i> that can change the key you press after that. If you click on such a blue key with your mouse, those changeable keys light up yellow. Click again and everything's back to normal. Examples are é, ñ, ó or ë.</p>
|
||||
<p>Below the keyboard representation are two more options:</p>
|
||||
<table summary="layout" border="0" cellpadding="2" cellspacing="0">
|
||||
<tr><td><span class="menu">Select Dead Keys</span></td><td> </td><td>for setting the above mentioned blue keys.</td></tr>
|
||||
<tr><td class="onelinetop"><span class="menu">Switch Shortcut Key...</span></td><td> </td><td>for using the shortcut key in Windows/Linux mode, i.e. <span class="key">CONTROL</span> (normally <span class="key">CTRL</span>) or Haiku mode, i.e. <span class="key">COMMAND</span> (normally <span class="key">ALT</span>).</td></tr>
|
||||
<tr><td><span class="menu">Select dead keys</span></td><td> </td><td>for setting the above mentioned blue keys.</td></tr>
|
||||
<tr><td class="onelinetop"><span class="menu">Switch shortcut key...</span></td><td> </td><td>for using the shortcut key in Windows/Linux mode, i.e. <span class="key">CONTROL</span> (normally <span class="key">CTRL</span>) or Haiku mode, i.e. <span class="key">COMMAND</span> (normally <span class="key">ALT</span>).</td></tr>
|
||||
</table>
|
||||
<p>The lists on the left offer the available pre-configured keymaps of the system, and below that, if available, user-defined maps. You can change a keymap via drag&drop in the keyboard representation: a left-click-drag copies a key, a right-click-drag exchanges the two keys.<br />
|
||||
When you're done you can save the result from the menu <span class="menu">File | Save...</span>. Your modified map will only appear in the user-defined list if it's stored in <span class="path">~/config/settings/Keymap/</span>. Otherwise you'll have to manually load it via <span class="menu">File | Open...</span>.</p>
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -65,7 +65,7 @@
|
||||
<p>On the left side, you can set the day of the month by simply clicking on it in the calendar. You change the month and year by clicking on it and using the up/down arrows to the right or the cursor keys on your keyboard.</p>
|
||||
<p>Similarly, you set the time. There are two modes for the clock:</p>
|
||||
<table summary="layout" border="0" cellpadding="2" cellspacing="0">
|
||||
<tr><td><span class="menu">Local Time</span></td><td> </td><td>to display your local time.</td></tr>
|
||||
<tr><td><span class="menu">Local time</span></td><td> </td><td>to display your local time.</td></tr>
|
||||
<tr><td><span class="menu">GMT</span></td><td> </td><td>to display Greenwich Mean Time.</td></tr>
|
||||
</table>
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -73,7 +73,7 @@
|
||||
<a href="#"><img src="../../images/up.png" style="border:none;float:right" alt="index" /></a>
|
||||
<a id="timezone" name="timezone">Timezone</a></h2>
|
||||
<img src="../images/prefs-images/time-timezone.png" alt="time-timezone.png" />
|
||||
<p>Simply find and choose your location from the pop-up menu and the list of cities and press <span class="button">Set Time Zone</span> to set your zone.</p>
|
||||
<p>Simply find and choose your location from the pop-up menu and the list of cities and press <span class="button">Set time zone</span> to set your zone.</p>
|
||||
<p><span class="button">Revert</span> brings back the settings that were active when you started the Time preferences.</p>
|
||||
|
||||
</div>
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -132,18 +132,18 @@ A good way to cut down the number of search results.</p>
|
||||
<p>Besides the gray background, result windows work exactly like any other Tracker window. Some things are worth noting:</p>
|
||||
<ul>
|
||||
<li><p>You can open the location of a file or folder by double clicking on its path attribute.</p></li>
|
||||
<li><p>With <span class="menu">File | Edit Query</span> or <span class="key">ALT</span> <span class="key">G</span> you get back to your Find window to refine your query.</p></li>
|
||||
<li><p>With <span class="menu">File | Edit query</span> or <span class="key">ALT</span> <span class="key">G</span> you get back to your Find window to refine your query.</p></li>
|
||||
<li><p>A query is live, i.e. if a file that matches your search criteria appears or disappears from your system, this change is reflected in your results in real-time.</p></li>
|
||||
</ul>
|
||||
<p>You can assign a sensible attribute layout for query results of a specific filetype. Open a folder containing files of the filetype you'd like to create a template for and arrange the attributes how you'd like to have query results presented. Copy this layout with <span class="menu">Attributes | Copy Layout</span>.</p>
|
||||
<p>Open <span class="path">/boot/home/config/settings/Tracker/DefaultQueryTemplates</span>, create a new folder named <i>group/filetype</i>, replacing the slash with an underscore, e.g. "audio_x-mp3". Open the new folder and paste in the previously copied layout with <span class="menu">Attributes | Paste Layout</span>.</p>
|
||||
<p>You can assign a sensible attribute layout for query results of a specific filetype. Open a folder containing files of the filetype you'd like to create a template for and arrange the attributes how you'd like to have query results presented. Copy this layout with <span class="menu">Attributes | Copy layout</span>.</p>
|
||||
<p>Open <span class="path">/boot/home/config/settings/Tracker/DefaultQueryTemplates</span>, create a new folder named <i>group/filetype</i>, replacing the slash with an underscore, e.g. "audio_x-mp3". Open the new folder and paste in the previously copied layout with <span class="menu">Attributes | Paste layout</span>.</p>
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
<h2>
|
||||
<a href="#"><img src="../images/up.png" style="border:none;float:right" alt="index" /></a>
|
||||
<a id="query-template" name="query-template">Query Templates</a></h2>
|
||||
<p>If you double click a saved query, the file search is at once started and the result window opens immediately. However, you may not want to search with these <i>exact</i> search parameters, but use it as starting point to only slightly tweak the formula.<br />
|
||||
By using the <span class="menu">Save Query as Template</span> menu item (see <a href="#find-window">(1) in screenshot</a> at the top) or drag&dropping the icon (10) anywhere with the right mouse button, you can create just such a template. Double clicking it won't open a result window, but the Find panel, giving you the opportunity to quickly change search strings or add/remove attributes.</p>
|
||||
By using the <span class="menu">Save query as template</span> menu item (see <a href="#find-window">(1) in screenshot</a> at the top) or drag&dropping the icon (10) anywhere with the right mouse button, you can create just such a template. Double clicking it won't open a result window, but the Find panel, giving you the opportunity to quickly change search strings or add/remove attributes.</p>
|
||||
<p>Wherever you choose to save query templates, they'll be listed in the Find panel's menu of recent queries.</p>
|
||||
</div>
|
||||
</div>
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -53,9 +53,9 @@
|
||||
<p>With <span class="key">CTRL</span> <span class="key">ALT</span> <span class="key">DEL</span> you invoke the Team Monitor which lists all currently running programs.</p>
|
||||
<img src="images/teammonitor-images/teammonitor.png" alt="teammonitor.png" />
|
||||
<p>Programs that were launched by the system are blue, those started by the user black.<br />
|
||||
Applications that are unresponsive, which is often a sign the program has crashed, are marked red. You can kill a program by selecting it and pressing the <span class="button">Kill Application</span> button.</p>
|
||||
Applications that are unresponsive, which is often a sign the program has crashed, are marked red. You can kill a program by selecting it and pressing the <span class="button">Kill application</span> button.</p>
|
||||
<p>You can summon a Terminal with <span class="key">OPT</span> <span class="key">ALT</span> <span class="key">T</span>.</p>
|
||||
<p>If your Tracker or Deskbar crashed or froze, a new button appears (you may have to kill the offending team first): <span class="button">Restart the Desktop</span> will restart Tracker and/or Deskbar for you.</p>
|
||||
<p>If your Tracker or Deskbar crashed or froze, a new button appears (you may have to kill the offending team first): <span class="button">Restart the desktop</span> will restart Tracker and/or Deskbar for you.</p>
|
||||
|
||||
</div>
|
||||
</div>
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -71,7 +71,7 @@
|
||||
<a id="mounting-volumes" name="mounting-volumes">Mounting Volumes</a></h2>
|
||||
<p>In order to access a harddisk, CD, USB stick etc., you first have to mount the volume, that is, let the system know it's there. This is done with a right-click on the Desktop or an already mounted volume (like the boot disk) and choosing the volume from the <span class="menu">Mount</span> submenu. You find the same <span class="menu">Mount</span> menu in the Deskbar.</p>
|
||||
<img src="images/tracker-images/mount-settings.png" alt="drill-down.png" />
|
||||
<p>There are also <span class="menu">Mount Settings</span> so you don't have to mount everything manually after every bootup.<br />
|
||||
<p>There are also <span class="menu">Settings</span> so you don't have to mount everything manually after every bootup.<br />
|
||||
The above settings will automatically mount any storage device you connect/insert and also mount all disks on bootup that were mounted previously.</p>
|
||||
<div class="box-warning">Before you disconnect e.g. a harddrive or USB stick, make sure you have successfully unmounted the volume. This guarantees that all data transfer has finished. Otherwise you may lose data or corrupt the disk!</div>
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -115,19 +115,19 @@ This type-ahead filtering is set in the <a href="#tracker-preferences.html">Trac
|
||||
<img src="images/tracker-images/window-menu.png" alt="window-menu.png" />
|
||||
<p>Tracker windows offer three different viewing modes from the <span class="menu">Window</span> menu:</p>
|
||||
<ul>
|
||||
<li><p><b>Icon View</b> (<span class="key">ALT</span> <span class="key">1</span>) - Big icons, you can change the size from the submenu or in/decrease their size with <span class="key">ALT</span> <span class="key">+</span>/<span class="key">ALT</span> <span class="key">-</span>.</p></li>
|
||||
<li><p><b>Mini Icon View</b> (<span class="key">ALT</span> <span class="key">2</span>) - Small icons.</p></li>
|
||||
<li><p><b>List View</b> (<span class="key">ALT</span> <span class="key">3</span>) - A detailed list of your files enabling you to show/hide available <i>attributes</i>. (See topic <a href="attributes.html">Attributes</a>.)</p></li>
|
||||
<li><p><b>Icon view</b> (<span class="key">ALT</span> <span class="key">1</span>) - Big icons, you can change the size from the submenu or in/decrease their size with <span class="key">ALT</span> <span class="key"> </span>/<span class="key">ALT</span> <span class="key">-</span>.</p></li>
|
||||
<li><p><b>Mini icon view</b> (<span class="key">ALT</span> <span class="key">2</span>) - Small icons.</p></li>
|
||||
<li><p><b>List view</b> (<span class="key">ALT</span> <span class="key">3</span>) - A detailed list of your files enabling you to show/hide available <i>attributes</i>. (See topic <a href="attributes.html">Attributes</a>.)</p></li>
|
||||
</ul>
|
||||
<p>The <span class="menu">Window</span> menu offers a number of other functions:</p>
|
||||
<ul>
|
||||
<li><p><b>Resize Window</b> (<span class="key">ALT</span> <span class="key">Y</span>) - Resizes the window to its ideal size.</p></li>
|
||||
<li><p><b>Clean Up</b> (<span class="key">ALT</span> <span class="key">K</span>) - Aligns all icons to an invisible grid. Hold down <span class="key">SHIFT</span> and the menu becomes <span class="menu">Clean Up All</span> which additionally sorts all icons alphabetically.</p></li>
|
||||
<li><p><b>Resize window</b> (<span class="key">ALT</span> <span class="key">Y</span>) - Resizes the window to its ideal size.</p></li>
|
||||
<li><p><b>Clean up</b> (<span class="key">ALT</span> <span class="key">K</span>) - Aligns all icons to an invisible grid. Hold down <span class="key">SHIFT</span> and the menu becomes <span class="menu">Clean up all</span> which additionally sorts all icons alphabetically.</p></li>
|
||||
<li><p><b>Select...</b> (<span class="key">SHIFT</span> <span class="key">ALT</span> <span class="key">A</span>) - Select files according to a <a href="http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Regular_expression" class="external free" title="Wikipedia: Regular expression">regular expression</a>.</p></li>
|
||||
<li><p><b>Close</b> (<span class="key">ALT</span> <span class="key">W</span>) - Closes the window. Hold down <span class="key">SHIFT</span> and the menu becomes <span class="menu">Close All</span> which closes every Tracker window.</p></li>
|
||||
<li><p><b>Close All in Workspace</b> (<span class="key">ALT</span> <span class="key">Q</span>) - Closes every Tracker window in the current workspace. A useful shortcut if you forgot to hold the <span class="key">OPT</span> key while clicking through folders and all those still open Tracker windows clutter your workspace.</p></li>
|
||||
<li><p><b>Close</b> (<span class="key">ALT</span> <span class="key">W</span>) - Closes the window. Hold down <span class="key">SHIFT</span> and the menu becomes <span class="menu">Close all</span> which closes every Tracker window.</p></li>
|
||||
<li><p><b>Close all in workspace</b> (<span class="key">ALT</span> <span class="key">Q</span>) - Closes every Tracker window in the current workspace. A useful shortcut if you forgot to hold the <span class="key">OPT</span> key while clicking through folders and all those still open Tracker windows clutter your workspace.</p></li>
|
||||
</ul>
|
||||
<p>Sometimes you just want to rearrange a few icons without doing a complete <span class="menu">Clean Up</span> (<span class="key">ALT</span> <span class="key">K</span>). In that case, you select these icons and start to drag them to their new location. Before you drop them there, keep <span class="key">ALT</span> pressed. This will align the icons to the invisible grid.</p>
|
||||
<p>Sometimes you just want to rearrange a few icons without doing a complete <span class="menu">Clean up</span> (<span class="key">ALT</span> <span class="key">K</span>). In that case, you select these icons and start to drag them to their new location. Before you drop them there, keep <span class="key">ALT</span> pressed. This will align the icons to the invisible grid.</p>
|
||||
<p>The rest of the functions are pretty self-explanatory, leaving the Tracker preferences.</p>
|
||||
|
||||
<h3>
|
||||
@@ -137,10 +137,10 @@ This type-ahead filtering is set in the <a href="#tracker-preferences.html">Trac
|
||||
<br />So, in short, the not so obvious settings:</p>
|
||||
<ul>
|
||||
<li><p><b>Desktop</b> - Decide if all mounted disks appear directly on the Desktop or in a window after clicking a single Disk icon sitting on the Desktop.</p></li>
|
||||
<li><p><b>Windows</b> - You can set <span class="menu">Single Window Navigation</span>, i.e. a double-clicked folder doesn't open in its own window, but inside the already open window instead, replacing the view of it's parent folder. This is not the same as clicking while holding the <span class="key">OPT</span> key, as described above, because you'll lose the per window saved position and size.
|
||||
<li><p><b>Windows</b> - You can set <span class="menu">Single window navigation</span>, i.e. a double-clicked folder doesn't open in its own window, but inside the already open window instead, replacing the view of it's parent folder. This is not the same as clicking while holding the <span class="key">OPT</span> key, as described above, because you'll lose the per window saved position and size.
|
||||
<br /><br /></p>
|
||||
<img src="images/tracker-images/tracker-preferences-navigator.png" alt="tracker-preferences-navigator.png" />
|
||||
<p>Before you switch Tracker to Single Window Navigation mode, because that may feel more familiar to you, we recommend giving the menu based browsing a try first, as that may actually work much faster for you after getting used to. On the other hand, single window browsing offers a <i>Navigator</i> where you can enter or copy&paste a path name and use back, forward and up buttons.</p>
|
||||
<p>Before you switch Tracker to Single Window Navigation mode, because that may feel more familiar to you, we recommend giving the menu based browsing a try first, as that may actually work much faster for you after getting used to. On the other hand, single window browsing offers a <i>Navigator</i> where you can enter or copy & paste a path name and use back, forward and up buttons.</p>
|
||||
<p>Activating <span class="menu">Type-ahead filtering</span> will filter the contents of a Tracker window while you type to only display the files matching your string in their name or any currently displayed attribute. See <a href="#type-ahead-filter">above</a>.</p></li>
|
||||
<li><p><b>Date and Time</b> - Set date and time formats.</p></li>
|
||||
<li><p><b>Trash</b> - Set the behavior when deleting a file.</p></li>
|
||||
@@ -158,23 +158,23 @@ This type-ahead filtering is set in the <a href="#tracker-preferences.html">Trac
|
||||
<li><p><b>New</b> - Create a new folder or any other file based on a <i>template</i>.
|
||||
<br /><br /></p>
|
||||
<img src="images/tracker-images/new-menu.png" alt="new-menu.png" />
|
||||
<p>Choosing <span class="menu">Edit Templates...</span> opens the folder <span class="path">/boot/home/config/settings/Tracker/Tracker New Templates</span>. Creating a file in that folder will offer its filetype with the file's name and other attributes as template in the <span class="menu">New</span> menu. Here, there's a file "Text" with the filetype <tt>text/plain</tt>. See topic <a href="filetypes.html">Filetypes</a> for more info.</p></li>
|
||||
<p>Choosing <span class="menu">Edit templates...</span> opens the folder <span class="path">/boot/home/config/settings/Tracker/Tracker New Templates</span>. Creating a file in that folder will offer its filetype with the file's name and other attributes as template in the <span class="menu">New</span> menu. Here, there's a file "Text" with the filetype <tt>text/plain</tt>. See topic <a href="filetypes.html">Filetypes</a> for more info.</p></li>
|
||||
<li><p><b>Open With...</b> - A submenu offers all applications that can handle this filetype.
|
||||
<br /><br /></p>
|
||||
<img src="images/tracker-images/open-with.png" alt="open-with.png" />
|
||||
|
||||
<p>The preferred application that would open the file when double-clicked, is checkmarked. This submenu lists first those applications that can handle the exact filetype, in this case it's a text file, the type <tt>text/plain</tt>. Next come all applications that can handle that supertype in general, here <tt>text/*</tt>. Last in the list are those that can deal with any file. If you don't click on an app in the submenu, but on the <span class="menu">Open With...</span> entry instead, a panel opens:</p>
|
||||
<p>The preferred application that would open the file when double-clicked, is checkmarked. This submenu lists first those applications that can handle the exact filetype, in this case it's a text file, the type <tt>text/plain</tt>. Next come all applications that can handle that supertype in general, here <tt>text/*</tt>. Last in the list are those that can deal with any file. If you don't click on an app in the submenu, but on the <span class="menu">Open with...</span> entry instead, a panel opens:</p>
|
||||
<br /><br />
|
||||
<img src="images/tracker-images/open-with-preferred.png" alt="open-with-preferred" />
|
||||
<p>Here you'll again find the programs that were listed in the submenu. By selecting one and clicking the <span class="button">Open and Make Preferred</span> button, you changed the preferred application for every file of that filetype, here <tt>text/plain</tt>.</p></li>
|
||||
<p>Here you'll again find the programs that were listed in the submenu. By selecting one and clicking the <span class="button">Open and make preferred</span> button, you changed the preferred application for every file of that filetype, here <tt>text/plain</tt>.</p></li>
|
||||
<li><b>Get Info</b>
|
||||
<br /><br />
|
||||
<img src="images/tracker-images/get-info.png" alt="get-info" />
|
||||
<p>The panel presents info on the selected file and lets you set the default application and, after you expanded that part of the panel, permissions and owner. Clicking on the path will open it in a Tracker window.</p></li>
|
||||
<li><p><b>Edit Name</b>, <b>Duplicate</b> and <b>Move to Trash</b> - lets you rename or duplicate a file or put the selected file(s) to the trash.</p></li>
|
||||
<li><p><b>Move to</b>, <b>Copy to</b> and <b>Create Link</b> - lets you move, copy or link the selected file(s) using the submenu navigating method. Holding <span class="key">SHIFT</span> while invoking the menu offers the option to create a relative link.</p></li>
|
||||
<li><p><b>Edit name</b>, <b>Duplicate</b> and <b>Move to trash</b> - lets you rename or duplicate a file or put the selected file(s) to the trash.</p></li>
|
||||
<li><p><b>Move to</b>, <b>Copy to</b> and <b>Create link</b> - lets you move, copy or link the selected file(s) using the submenu navigating method. Holding <span class="key">SHIFT</span> while invoking the menu offers the option to create a relative link.</p></li>
|
||||
<li><p><b>Cut</b>, <b>Copy</b> and <b>Paste</b> - lets you cut, copy and paste files using the clipboard. By holding <span class="key">SHIFT</span> while invoking the menu you can <b>Copy/Cut more</b> files, maybe from another folder that you can paste somewhere else later. Also, while holding <span class="key">SHIFT</span> you can paste the copied files in the clipboard as links.</p></li>
|
||||
<li><p><b>Identify</b> - will sniff out and set the type of files if they didn't have one before, e.g. if you transferred a file with <span class="cli">wget</span> which doesn't set a filetype itself. Holding <span class="key">SHIFT</span> while invoking the menu changes the item to <b>Force Identify</b> which identifies the filetype and corrects it if it was false before.</p></li>
|
||||
<li><p><b>Identify</b> - will sniff out and set the type of files if they didn't have one before, e.g. if you transferred a file with <span class="cli">wget</span> which doesn't set a filetype itself. Holding <span class="key">SHIFT</span> while invoking the menu changes the item to <b>Force identify</b> which identifies the filetype and corrects it if it was false before.</p></li>
|
||||
<li><p><b>Add-Ons</b> - offers you every generic Tracker add-on and those that can handle the selected file(s). See topic <a href="tracker-add-ons.html">Tracker Add-ons</a> for more information.</p></li>
|
||||
</ul>
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -108,7 +108,7 @@ To that we add a couple of attributes. Here we have to decide if we want to quer
|
||||
<a href="#"><img src="../images/up.png" style="border:none;float:right" alt="index" /></a>
|
||||
<a id="description" name="description">Description</a></h3>
|
||||
<ul>
|
||||
<li><i>Type Name</i> - Appears e.g. in the Attribute menu of Tracker windows and the "Kind" attribute of a file.</li>
|
||||
<li><i>Type name</i> - Appears e.g. in the Attribute menu of Tracker windows and the "Kind" attribute of a file.</li>
|
||||
<li><i>Description</i> - A bit more detailed description.</li>
|
||||
</ul>
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -127,8 +127,8 @@ To that we add a couple of attributes. Here we have to decide if we want to quer
|
||||
<p>Here we enter all the custom attributes we decided on in our preparations. Clicking the <span class="button">Add...</span> button opens a panel:</p>
|
||||
<img src="images/workshop-filetypes+attributes-images/filetype-extra-attribute.png" alt="filetype-extra-attribute.png" />
|
||||
<ul>
|
||||
<li><p><i>Attribute Name</i> - Appears e.g. as the column heading in Tracker windows.</p></li>
|
||||
<li><p><i>Internal Name</i> - Is used for indexing and querying the attribute.</p></li>
|
||||
<li><p><i>Attribute name</i> - Appears e.g. as the column heading in Tracker windows.</p></li>
|
||||
<li><p><i>Internal name</i> - Is used for indexing and querying the attribute.</p></li>
|
||||
<li><i>Type</i> - Defines the value the attribute can hold and therefore how it can be queried.
|
||||
<ul>
|
||||
<li><span class="menu">String</span> for normal text</li>
|
||||
@@ -149,7 +149,7 @@ To that we add a couple of attributes. Here we have to decide if we want to quer
|
||||
</ul>
|
||||
<ul>
|
||||
<li><i>Visible</i> - This checkbox determines if the attribute is visible in a Tracker window at all. Since the Tracker will be the interface to our DVD database, we check it and define its appearance with:<ul>
|
||||
<li><span class="menu">Display As</span> - Leave on "Default". In the future more option will become available, e.g. a bar or stars for a rating etc.</li>
|
||||
<li><span class="menu">Display as</span> - Leave on "Default". In the future more option will become available, e.g. a bar or stars for a rating etc.</li>
|
||||
<li><span class="menu">Editable</span> - Determines if the attribute shall be editable in Tracker.</li>
|
||||
<li><span class="menu">Width</span> - The default width of that attributes column in a Tracker window.</li>
|
||||
<li><span class="menu">Alignment</span> - The attribute can be displayed left, center, or right aligned.</li>
|
||||
@@ -205,9 +205,9 @@ Since our basic file is a cover image, we go to some online resource like IMdB,
|
||||
<a id="query-db" name="query-db">Querying the database</a></h2>
|
||||
<p>Several hours of grunt work later, we have a nice little database that you can query to find all your Christina Ricci movies that have a 7+ rating... :)</p>
|
||||
<p>You can assign a sensible attribute layout for query results of a specific filetype.<br />
|
||||
Open the folder containing your DVDdb files and arrange the attributes how you'd like to have query results presented. Copy this layout with <span class="menu">Attributes | Copy Layout</span>.</p>
|
||||
Open the folder containing your DVDdb files and arrange the attributes how you'd like to have query results presented. Copy this layout with <span class="menu">Attributes | Copy layout</span>.</p>
|
||||
<p>Open <span class="path">/boot/home/config/settings/Tracker/DefaultQueryTemplates</span>, create a new folder and rename it to <i>group/filetype</i>, replacing slashes with underscores; in our case "applications_DVDdb".</p>
|
||||
<p>Open the new folder and paste in the layout with <span class="menu">Attributes | Paste Layout</span>. Voilà:</p>
|
||||
<p>Open the new folder and paste in the layout with <span class="menu">Attributes | Paste layout</span>. Voilà:</p>
|
||||
<img src="images/workshop-filetypes+attributes-images/query-dvddb.png" alt="query-dvddb.png" />
|
||||
|
||||
</div>
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -120,7 +120,7 @@ En cualquier otro caso, la desinstalación se lleva a cabo simplemente borrando
|
||||
<tr><td style="width:24px;"><img src="../images/apps-images/mediaplayer-icon_16.png" alt="icon" width="16" height="16" /></td><td><a href="applications/mediaplayer.html">MediaPlayer</a></td><td> </td>
|
||||
<td valign="top">A player for all supported audio/video files.</td></tr>
|
||||
<tr><td style="width:24px;"><img src="../images/apps-images/midiplayer-icon_16.png" alt="icon" width="16" height="16" /></td><td><a href="applications/midiplayer.html">MidiPlayer</a></td><td> </td>
|
||||
<td valign="top"><span style="color:silver">Un reproductor de ficheros MIDI. [<i>todavía falta</i>]</span></td></tr>
|
||||
<td valign="top">A player for MIDI files.</td></tr>
|
||||
<tr><td style="width:24px;"><img src="../images/apps-images/packageinstaller-icon_16.png" alt="icon" width="16" height="16" /></td><td><a href="applications/packageinstaller.html">PackageInstaller</a></td><td> </td>
|
||||
<td valign="top"><span style="color:silver">Instalador de paquetes BeOS en formato PKG. [<i>todavía falta</i>]</span></td></tr>
|
||||
<tr><td style="width:24px;"><img src="../images/apps-images/people-icon_16.png" alt="icon" width="16" height="16" /></td><td><a href="applications/people.html">People</a></td><td> </td>
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -4,7 +4,7 @@
|
||||
<head>
|
||||
<!--
|
||||
*
|
||||
* Copyright 2008, Haiku. All rights reserved.
|
||||
* Copyright 2008-2011, Haiku. All rights reserved.
|
||||
* Distributed under the terms of the MIT License.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* Authors:
|
||||
@@ -50,6 +50,7 @@
|
||||
|
||||
<div id="content">
|
||||
<div>
|
||||
<div class="box-info">La traducción de esta página no está completa aún. Hasta que esté, las partes sin terminar vienen en su inglés original.</div>
|
||||
|
||||
<h1>La interfaz gráfica de usuario de Haiku</h1>
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -67,7 +68,15 @@
|
||||
<li><p>El botón "zoom" (o con <span class="key">CTRL</span> <span class="key">ALT</span> <span class="key">Z</span>). En la mayoría de las aplicaciones, esto expandirá una ventana a su tamaño máximo. Sin embargo, no siempre es así. Las ventanas del Tracker, por ejemplo, se retamañarán para ajustar mejor a los contenidos.</p></li>
|
||||
<li><p>La esquina de retamañado. Arrastrándola a cualquier otro lugar en un borde de ventana moverá las dimensiones de la ventana.</p></li>
|
||||
</ol>
|
||||
<div class="box-info">Mientras se sostienen <span class="key">CTRL</span> y <span class="key">ALT</span>, se puede dar clic en cualquier lugar dentro de una ventana para moverla con el botón izquierdo del ratón; el botón derecho la manda al fondo.</div>
|
||||
|
||||
<h2>
|
||||
<a href="#"><img src="../images/up.png" style="border:none;float:right" alt="index" /></a>
|
||||
<a id="move-resize" name="move-resize">A quick way to move or resize windows</a></h2>
|
||||
<p>Moving and resizing windows is a large part of interacting with several concurrently running applications. Instead of aiming at the small yellow title tab or the even tinier window border, there's a more convenient way to move a window. Also, additionally to its small size, the resize corner has another limitation: It only allows resizing at and in the direction of the lower right corner.</p>
|
||||
<p>To address these issues, Haiku provides a neat solution using the window management key combo <span class="key">CTRL</span> <span class="key">ALT</span> and the mouse. See also chapter <a href="keyboard-shortcuts.html#general">Shortcuts and key combinations</a> for more shortcuts concerning window management.</p>
|
||||
<img src="images/gui-images/resizing.png" alt="resizing.png" />
|
||||
<p>Holding down <span class="key">CTRL</span> <span class="key">ALT</span> will highlight the window borders nearest to the mouse pointer. Move the mouse in the direction of another border to change the target. Click and dragging with the <i>right mouse button</i> will resize the window along the highlighted border(s).</p>
|
||||
<p>Hold down <span class="key">CTRL</span> <span class="key">ALT</span> and click and drag with the <i>left mouse button</i> anywhere in a window to move it around. A quick click with the <i>right mouse button</i> sends it to the back.</p>
|
||||
|
||||
<h2>
|
||||
<a href="#"><img src="../images/up.png" style="border:none;float:right" alt="index" /></a>
|
||||
|
||||
|
After Width: | Height: | Size: 9.0 KiB |
|
After Width: | Height: | Size: 7.5 KiB |
|
After Width: | Height: | Size: 6.1 KiB |
|
After Width: | Height: | Size: 5.3 KiB |
|
After Width: | Height: | Size: 8.9 KiB |
@@ -4,7 +4,7 @@
|
||||
<head>
|
||||
<!--
|
||||
*
|
||||
* Copyright 2008-2010, Haiku. All rights reserved.
|
||||
* Copyright 2008-2011, Haiku. All rights reserved.
|
||||
* Distributed under the terms of the MIT License.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* Authors:
|
||||
@@ -64,17 +64,20 @@
|
||||
<table summary="shortcuts" border="0" cellspacing="0" cellpadding="4">
|
||||
<tr><td><span class="key">ALT</span> <span class="key">Fx</span></td><td style="width:15px;"></td><td>Intercambia al <a href="workspaces.html">Espacio de trabajo</a> X (donde <span class="key">Fx</span> es la tecla de función correspondiente a ese espacio de trabajo). Lleve la ventana activa con usted agregando la tecla <span class="key">MAYÚSCULAS</span></td></tr>
|
||||
<tr><td class="onelinetop"><span class="key">CTRL</span> <span class="key">ALT</span> <span class="key">←</span>/<span class="key">→</span>/<span class="key">↑</span>/<span class="key">↓</span></td><td></td><td>Navega espacialmente entre filas y columnas de los espacios de trabajo disponibles. Agregue <span class="key">MAYÚSCULAS</span> para llevar la ventana activa con usted.</td></tr>
|
||||
<tr><td><span class="key">CTRL</span> <span class="key">ALT</span> + left mouse</td><td></td><td>Click and drag with left mouse button to move a window (see chapter <a href="gui.html#move-resize">GUI</a>).</td></tr>
|
||||
<tr><td><span class="key">CTRL</span> <span class="key">ALT</span> + right mouse</td><td></td><td>Click and drag with right mouse button to resize a window (see chapter <a href="gui.html#move-resize">GUI</a>).</td></tr>
|
||||
<tr><td><span class="key">CTRL</span> <span class="key">ALT</span> <span class="key">Z</span></td><td></td><td>Ajusta una ventana a un tamaño alternativo (tamaño máximo para la mayoría de las aplicaciones).</td></tr>
|
||||
<tr><td><span class="key">CTRL</span> <span class="key">ALT</span> <span class="key">M</span></td><td></td><td>Minimiza la ventana activa.</td></tr>
|
||||
<tr><td><span class="key">CTRL</span> <span class="key">ALT</span> <span class="key">H</span></td><td></td><td>Oculta (minimiza) todas las ventanas de la aplicación activa.</td></tr>
|
||||
<tr><td><span class="key">CTRL</span> <span class="key">ALT</span> <span class="key">F</span></td><td></td><td>Jala la ventana activa al frente (sólo aplica cuando está activa la preferencia del ratón <a href="preferences/mouse.html">El foco sigue al ratón</a>).</td></tr>
|
||||
<tr><td><span class="key">CTRL</span> <span class="key">ALT</span> <span class="key">B</span></td><td></td><td>Envía la ventana activa al fondo.</td></tr>
|
||||
<tr><td><span class="key">CTRL</span> <span class="key">TAB</span></td><td></td><td>Mantener presionado para traer a <a href="twitcher.html">Twitcher</a>.</td></tr>
|
||||
<tr><td><span class="key">CTRL</span> <span class="key">ALT</span> <span class="key">DEL</span></td><td></td><td>Abre el <a href="teammonitor.html">Monitor de actividad</a>.</td></tr>
|
||||
<tr><td><span class="key">ALT</span> <span class="key">ESC</span></td><td></td><td>Ingresa la barra de menú (se sale con <span class="key">ESC</span>).</td></tr>
|
||||
<tr><td><span class="key">ALT</span> <span class="key">C</span></td><td></td><td>Copia la selección al portapapeles.</td></tr>
|
||||
<tr><td><span class="key">ALT</span> <span class="key">X</span></td><td></td><td>Corta la selección al portapapeles.</td></tr>
|
||||
<tr><td><span class="key">ALT</span> <span class="key">V</span></td><td></td><td>Pega el contenido del portapapeles.</td></tr>
|
||||
<tr><td><span class="key">ALT</span> <span class="key">W</span></td><td></td><td>Cierra la ventana activa.</td></tr><tr><td><span class="key">CTRL</span> <span class="key">ALT</span> <span class="key">Z</span></td><td></td><td>Ajusta una ventana a un tamaño alternativo (tamaño máximo para la mayoría de las aplicaciones).</td></tr>
|
||||
<tr><td><span class="key">CTRL</span> <span class="key">ALT</span> <span class="key">M</span></td><td></td><td>Minimiza la ventana activa.</td></tr>
|
||||
<tr><td><span class="key">CTRL</span> <span class="key">ALT</span> <span class="key">H</span></td><td></td><td>Oculta (minimiza) todas las ventanas de la aplicación activa.</td></tr>
|
||||
<tr><td><span class="key">CTRL</span> <span class="key">ALT</span> <span class="key">F</span></td><td></td><td>Jala la ventana activa al frente (sólo aplica cuando está activa la preferencia del ratón <a href="preferences/mouse.html">El foco sigue al ratón</a>).</td></tr>
|
||||
<tr><td><span class="key">CTRL</span> <span class="key">ALT</span> <span class="key">B</span></td><td></td><td>Envía la ventana activa al fondo.</td></tr>
|
||||
<tr><td><span class="key">ALT</span> <span class="key">W</span></td><td></td><td>Cierra la ventana activa.</td></tr>
|
||||
<tr><td><span class="key">ALT</span> <span class="key">Q</span></td><td></td><td>Cierra una aplicación.</td></tr>
|
||||
<tr><td><span class="key">PRINT</span></td><td style="width:15px;"></td><td>Takes a screenshot with zero delay and launches the <a href="applications/screenshot.html">Screenshot</a> panel.</td></tr>
|
||||
<tr><td class="onelinetop"><span class="key">SHIFT</span> <span class="key">PRINT</span></td><td></td><td>Takes a screenshot silently (without opening the panel), while still respecting the last used settings.</td></tr>
|
||||
@@ -123,8 +126,9 @@
|
||||
<tr><td><span class="key">MAYÚSCULAS</span></td><td style="width:15px;"></td><td>Seleccionará todo entre el primer item señalado y al que se le dé clic después.</td></tr>
|
||||
<tr><td><span class="key">ALT</span></td><td></td><td>Agrega o remueve el elemento sobre el que se haga clic en la selección.</td></tr>
|
||||
</table>
|
||||
<p>En una ventana nueva, apenas y comience a escribir, Tracker se desplaza y selecciona el archivo que mejor se ajusta la búsqueda incremental. Si no hubiera archivo comenzando con las letras que se apunten, los archivos que contengan la cadena de búsqueda en cualquier parte en su nombre u otro atributo desplegado se seleccionan. Esta búsqueda <i>no</i> distingue entre mayúsculas y minúsculas.<br />
|
||||
Las letras que escribió aparecen en la parte inferior izquierda, donde normalmente el número de lista de elementos. Después de un segundo se revierte y se puede iniciar una nueva búsqueda intelectual.</p>
|
||||
<p>In a Tracker window, if you just start typing, Tracker scrolls to and selects the file that best fits your incremental search. If there's no file starting with your typed letters, files that contain the search string anywhere in their name or other displayed attributes are selected. This search is <i>not</i> case-sensitive.<br />
|
||||
The letters you type appear at the bottom-left, where normally the number of items is listed. After a second it reverts back and you could start a new incremental search.<br />
|
||||
Instead of jumping to the first occurrence of your search string, Tracker can be configured to filter out all non-matching files. See the topic on <a href="tracker.html#tracker-preferences">type-ahead filtering</a>.</p>
|
||||
|
||||
</div>
|
||||
</div>
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -12,6 +12,7 @@
|
||||
* Translators:
|
||||
* miguel~1.mx
|
||||
* Oscar Carballal
|
||||
* Humdinger
|
||||
*
|
||||
-->
|
||||
<meta http-equiv="content-type" content="text/html; charset=utf-8" />
|
||||
@@ -76,7 +77,7 @@ Glyph hinting (Glifos insinuados)</h3>
|
||||
<p>Cuando <span class="menu">Glyph hinting</span> se activa, se alinean todas las letras de tal manera que sus orillas vertical y horizontal descansan exactamente entre dos pixeles. El resultado es un contraste prefecto, especialmente cuando se trata con negro sobre blanco. El texto aparece más preciso. También hay una seleccion para "<span class="menu">Únicamente tipos de letra monoespaciados</span>"; es especialmente útil para dispositivos de baja resolución como netbooks. Las fuentes pequeñas pueden verse muy mal cuando la definición adicional (hinting) está encendida, pero con esta selección puede todavía sacar ventaja de la definición adicional para editores de texto y la Terminal.</p>
|
||||
<p>Vea la diferencia que la definición adicional hace con estas capturas de pantalla aumentadas:</p>
|
||||
<table summary="layout" border="0" cellspacing="0" cellpadding="2">
|
||||
<tr><td style="text-align:center; font-style:italic"><img src="../../images/prefs-images/appearance-glyph-off.png" alt="appearance-glyph-off.png" /><br />Definición adicional: apagada</td><td style="width:15px;"></td><td style="text-align:center; font-style:italic"><img src="../../images/prefs-images/appearance-glyph-on.png" alt="appearance-glyph-on.png" /><br />Definición adicional: encendida</td></tr>
|
||||
<tr><td style="text-align:center; font-style:italic"><img src="../images/prefs-images/appearance-glyph-off.png" alt="appearance-glyph-off.png" /><br />Definición adicional: apagada</td><td style="width:15px;"></td><td style="text-align:center; font-style:italic"><img src="../images/prefs-images/appearance-glyph-on.png" alt="appearance-glyph-on.png" /><br />Definición adicional: encendida</td></tr>
|
||||
</table>
|
||||
<p>Debe señalarse que todas las ventanas <span class="app">Magnify</span> (aumentadas) en esta página son por supuesto renderadas en sí mismas con las opciones diferentes también. Así que se puede obtener una impresión en el mundo real de las selecciones al comparar, por ejemplo, el título de la ficha amarilla en negrita o el texto "33 x 15 @ 8 pixels/pixel".</p>
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -88,13 +89,13 @@ Tipos de Antialiasing</h3>
|
||||
<span class="menu">LCD subpixel</span> hace un mejor trabajo todavía, especialmente con monitores LCD (de alta resolución). En lugar de la intensidad de un pixel, cambia su color el cual mueve una orilla por una fracción de pixel, porque las pantallas LCD producen cada pixel con un componente rojo, verde y azul.</p>
|
||||
<p>De nuevo, los dos métodos diferentes con capturas de pantalla aumentadas:</p>
|
||||
<table summary="layout" border="0" cellspacing="0" cellpadding="2">
|
||||
<tr><td style="text-align:center; font-style:italic"><img src="../../images/prefs-images/appearance-glyph-off.png" alt="appearance-glyph-off.png" /><br />Escala de grises, definición adicional: apagada</td><td style="width:15px;"></td><td style="text-align:center; font-style:italic"><img src="../../images/prefs-images/appearance-subpixel.png" alt="appearance-subpixel.png" /><br />Subpixel LCD, definición adicional: apagada</td></tr>
|
||||
<tr><td style="text-align:center; font-style:italic"><img src="../images/prefs-images/appearance-glyph-off.png" alt="appearance-glyph-off.png" /><br />Escala de grises, definición adicional: apagada</td><td style="width:15px;"></td><td style="text-align:center; font-style:italic"><img src="../images/prefs-images/appearance-subpixel.png" alt="appearance-subpixel.png" /><br />Subpixel LCD, definición adicional: apagada</td></tr>
|
||||
</table>
|
||||
<p>El antialias basado en subpixel agrega un brillo ligeramente coloreado a los objetos. Algo que no todos toleran. En Haiku se pueden combinar los dos métodos de antialias y encontrar la selección adecuada al usar una guía de selección.</p>
|
||||
<div class="box-info">El antialias basado en subpixel en combinación con el glyph hinting se sujeta a una patente de software y por ello no está disponible predeterminadamente. Dependiendo en dónde viva, puede tener una versión desbloqueada. Disculpe por ello. Consulte con su representante local.</div>
|
||||
<p>Si activa el suavizado adicional más el renderado de subpixel LCD cambiando archivos fuente y recompilando, así es como se ve, comparado al suavizado adicional con escala de grises:</p>
|
||||
<table summary="layout" border="0" cellspacing="0" cellpadding="2">
|
||||
<tr><td style="text-align:center; font-style:italic"><img src="../../images/prefs-images/appearance-glyph-on.png" alt="appearance-glyph-on.png" /><br />Escala de grises, definición adicional: encendida</td><td style="width:15px;"></td><td style="text-align:center; font-style:italic"><img src="../../images/prefs-images/appearance-glyph-on-subpixel.png" alt="appearance-glyph-on-subpixel.png" /><br />Subpixel de LCD, definición adicional: encendida</td></tr>
|
||||
<tr><td style="text-align:center; font-style:italic"><img src="../images/prefs-images/appearance-glyph-on.png" alt="appearance-glyph-on.png" /><br />Escala de grises, definición adicional: encendida</td><td style="width:15px;"></td><td style="text-align:center; font-style:italic"><img src="../images/prefs-images/appearance-glyph-on-subpixel.png" alt="appearance-glyph-on-subpixel.png" /><br />Subpixel de LCD, definición adicional: encendida</td></tr>
|
||||
</table>
|
||||
<p><br /></p>
|
||||
<p>Al fondo del panel hay dos botones:</p>
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -49,6 +49,7 @@
|
||||
|
||||
<div id="content">
|
||||
<div>
|
||||
<div class="box-info">La traducción de esta página no está completa aún. Hasta que esté, las partes sin terminar vienen en su inglés original.</div>
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
<table class="index" id="index" summary="index">
|
||||
@@ -73,8 +74,8 @@
|
||||
<a id="mounting-volumes" name="mounting-volumes">Montar volúmenes</a></h2>
|
||||
<p>Para ingresar a un disco duro, CD, unidad de almacenamiento USB, etc., hay que montar el volumen primero, es decir, hacerle saber al sistema que está allí. Esto se realiza con un clic derecho en el Escritorio o en un volumen ya montado (como el disco de inicio) y seleccionado el volumen desde el submenú <span class="menu">Mount</span> (mohtar). Puede encontrar el mismo menú <span class="menu">Mount</span> en la barra de escritorio Deskbar.</p>
|
||||
<img src="images/tracker-images/mount-settings.png" alt="drill-down.png" />
|
||||
<p>También hay <span class="menu">Mount Settings</span> (selecciones de montaje) para que no tenga que montar todo manualmente después de cada inicio de sistema.<br />
|
||||
Las selecciones de arriba automáticamente montarán cualquier dispositivo de almacenamiento que se haya conectado o insertado y también montará todos los discos al inicio que fueron montados previamente.</p>
|
||||
<p>There are also <span class="menu">Settings</span> so you don't have to mount everything manually after every bootup.<br />
|
||||
The above settings will automatically mount any storage device you connect/insert and also mount all disks on bootup that were mounted previously.</p>
|
||||
<div class="box-warning">Antes de desconectar, p. ej., un disco duro o una unidad USB, asegúrese de haber desmontado exitosamente el volumen. Esto garantiza que toda la transferencia de información haya terminado. ¡De lo contrario podría perder su información o corromper el disco!</div>
|
||||
|
||||
<h2>
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -118,7 +118,7 @@ Sinon, vous pouvez vous contenter de supprimer le dossier de l'application.</p>
|
||||
<tr><td style="width:24px;"><img src="../images/apps-images/mediaplayer-icon_16.png" alt="icon" width="16" height="16" /></td><td><a href="applications/mediaplayer.html">MediaPlayer</a></td><td> </td>
|
||||
<td valign="top">Un lecteur audio/vidéo supportant un grand nombre de formats.</td></tr>
|
||||
<tr><td style="width:24px;"><img src="../images/apps-images/midiplayer-icon_16.png" alt="icon" width="16" height="16" /></td><td><a href="applications/midiplayer.html">MidiPlayer</a></td><td> </td>
|
||||
<td valign="top"><span style="color:silver">Un lecteur de fichiers MIDI [<i>pas encore documenté</i>]</span></td></tr>
|
||||
<td valign="top">Un lecteur de fichiers MIDI</td></tr>
|
||||
<tr><td style="width:24px;"><img src="../images/apps-images/packageinstaller-icon_16.png" alt="icon" width="16" height="16" /></td><td><a href="applications/packageinstaller.html">PackageInstaller</a></td><td> </td>
|
||||
<td valign="top"><span style="color:silver">Permet d'installer les archives de programmes BeOS au format PKG [<i>pas encore documenté</i>]</span></td></tr>
|
||||
<tr><td style="width:24px;"><img src="../images/apps-images/people-icon_16.png" alt="icon" width="16" height="16" /></td><td><a href="applications/people.html">People</a></td><td> </td>
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -50,7 +50,6 @@
|
||||
|
||||
<div id="content">
|
||||
<div>
|
||||
<div class="box-info">Cette page n'est pas encore entièrement traduite. Les parties non encore traduites seront en anglais.</div>
|
||||
|
||||
<h2><img src="../../images/apps-images/mediaplayer-icon_64.png" alt="mediaplayer-icon_64.png" width="64" height="64" />MediaPlayer</h2>
|
||||
<table summary="layout" border="0" cellspacing="0" cellpadding="2">
|
||||
@@ -61,39 +60,42 @@
|
||||
<p><br /></p>
|
||||
<p>MediaPlayer est le lecteur par défaut pour tous les fichiers audio et vidéo. Grâce à la bibliothèque <a href="http://www.ffmpeg.org/">ffmpeg</a>, une pléthore de formats couramment utilisés sont pris en charge. Son interface simple fournie toutes les commandes que vous attendez :</p>
|
||||
<img src="../images/apps-images/mediaplayer.png" alt="mediaplayer.png" />
|
||||
<p>The slider of the progress bar allows you to quickly skim to a position, resting the mouse over it shows the current and remaining time of the clip. Clicking on the time display to the right of it, toggles between length, current and remaining time.<br />
|
||||
Below that you find the usual controls to skip to the previous track, play/pause, stop and jump to the next track. Then comes a volume control (clicking the speaker symbol toggles muting) and a VU meter.</p>
|
||||
<p>Le curseur de la barre de progression vous permet de changer rapidement de position, En passant la souris au-dessus il affichera le temps écoulé et restant à lire. un clic sur l'affichage de l'heure à la droite de cet indicateur, basculera entre un affichage court ou long du temps restant.<br />
|
||||
En-dessous vous trouverez les contrôles habituels pour revenir à la piste précédente, suspendre/reprendre la lecture, l'arrêter et passer à la piste suivante. Vient ensuite le contrôle du volume (en cliquant sur le symbole du haut-parleur vous pourrez basculer en mode sourdine), et un VU-mètre.</p>
|
||||
|
||||
<h2>Lecture audio et vidéo</h2>
|
||||
<p>Comme il n'y a pas de fonctionnalités spécifiques à la lecture audio, nous allons passer directement aux fonctionnalités vidéo ou générales.</p>
|
||||
<img src="../images/apps-images/mediaplayer-info.png" alt="mediaplayer-info.png" />
|
||||
<p>Les informations du fichier <span class="menu">File info...</span> (<span class="key">ALT</span> <span class="key">I</span>) sont disponibles pour tous les médias. Vous accédez ainsi à la durée du fichier, aux détails des pistes Audio/Vidéo et de leurs codecs.</p>
|
||||
<p>Most of the often used commands from the menus are also available from a right-click context menu on the video area. Convenient when in full-screen mode.<br />
|
||||
Under <span class="menu">Video</span> you'll find options to zoom the window to various levels or force the aspect ratio to some standard values. Leaving the aspect ration to the default <span class="menu">Stream settings</span> should work best for correctly encoded files.</p>
|
||||
<p>Les commandes du menus les plus utilisées sont également accessibles dans le menu contextuel d'un clic droit dans la zone vidéo, Cequi est très pratique en mode plein écran. <br />
|
||||
Dans <span class="menu">Vidéo</span>, vous trouverez les options pour agrandir l'image et pour forcer ses proportions. Laisser les proportions par défaut dans les réglages du flux (<span class="menu">Stream settings</span>) est ce qui fonctionne le mieux pour les fichiers encodés correctement.</p>
|
||||
<p>MediaPlayer supporte les sous-titres au format <a href="http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/SubRip">SRT</a>. Pour les faire apparaître dans <span class="menu">Subtitles</span> (Sous-titres), leurs noms de fichiers doivent être identiques à celui du fichier vidéo avec à la place de l'extension, le nom de la langue et le suffixe ".srt". Par exemple :</p>
|
||||
<pre>MyMovie.avi
|
||||
MyMovie.Deutsch.srt
|
||||
MyMovie.English.srt
|
||||
MyMovie.Français.srt</pre>
|
||||
<p>Multiple audio tracks, most often used for several languages inside one video file, are available from the <span class="menu">Audio track</span> submenu. The <span class="menu">Video | Track</span> submenu offers the same when having multiple video streams available.</p>
|
||||
<p>Vous pouvez : basculer en mode plein écran (<span class="menu">Full screen</span>) avec <span class="key">Alt</span> <span class="key">Entrée</span>, <span class="key">Alt</span> <span class="key">F</span> ou un double-clic; cacher les bordures de fenètres et les boutons de contrôles du MediaPlayer avec <span class="menu">Hide interface</span>(cacher l'interface), <span class="key">Alt</span> <span class="key">H</span> ou un double-clic droit; ou encore garder la fenètre toujours au dessus avec <span class="menu">Always on top</span> ou <span class="key">Alt</span> <span class="key">A</span>.</p>
|
||||
<p>Le sous-menu <span class="menu">Video | Track</span>
|
||||
(Vidéo | Piste) vous permet de choisir entre les différentes pistes audio qui peuvent être contenues dans le fichier vidéo quand celui ci contient plusieurs langues.
|
||||
Le sous-menu <span class="menu">Video | Track</span> (Vidéo | Piste) vous offre la même chose quand plusieurs vues différentes sont disponibles dans le flux vidéo.</p>
|
||||
<p>Vous pouvez : basculer en mode <span class="menu">Plein écran</span> (<span class="menu">Full screen</span>) avec <span class="key">Alt</span> <span class="key">Entrée</span>, <span class="key">Alt</span> <span class="key">F</span> ou un double-clic; cacher les bordures de fenètres et les boutons de contrôles du MediaPlayer avec <span class="menu">Masquer l'interface</span> (<span class="menu">Hide interface</span>), <span class="key">Alt</span> <span class="key">H</span> ou un double-clic droit; ou encore garder la fenètre <span class="menu">Toujours au dessus</span> (<span class="menu">Always on top</span>) ou <span class="key">Alt</span> <span class="key">A</span>.</p>
|
||||
|
||||
<h2>Listes de lectures</h2>
|
||||
<p><span class="menu">MediaPlayer | Playlist...</span> (<span class="key">ALT</span> <span class="key">P</span>) ouvre la fenêtre de la d'attente. Double-cliquez sur une entrée pour commencer la lecture du fichier associé.</p>
|
||||
<img src="../images/apps-images/mediaplayer-playlist.png" alt="mediaplayer-playlist.png" />
|
||||
<p>You can add more files by dropping them into the list and rearrange their position via drag & drop. From the <span class="menu">Edit</span> menu you can <span class="menu">Randomize</span> or <span class="menu">Remove</span> (<span class="key">DEL</span>) an entry from the list or delete the actual file with <span class="menu">Move to Trash</span> (<span class="key">ALT</span> <span class="key">T</span>).</p>
|
||||
<p>Vous pouvez ajouter plus de fichiers en les déposant dans la liste, et modifier leur ordre en les déplaçant à la souris.
|
||||
À partir du menu <span class="menu">Edit</span> (<span class="menu">Éditer</span>) vous pouvez <span class="menu">Mélanger</span> (<span class="menu">Randomize</span>) ou <span class="menu">retirer</span> (<span class="menu">Remove</span> / <span class="key">Suppr</span>) une entrée de la liste ou encore <span class="menu">Envoyer le fichier à la corbeille</span> pour le supprimer réellement (<span class="menu">Move to Trash</span> / <span class="key">ALT</span> <span class="key">T</span>).</p>
|
||||
<p>Bien sûr, vous pouvez enregistrer (<span class="menu">Save</span>) une liste de lecture pour l'ouvrir de nouveau (<span class="menu">Open</span>) plus tard, ou la lancer en double-cliquant simplement sur son fichier.</p>
|
||||
|
||||
<h2>Réglages</h2>
|
||||
<p>Il existe plusieurs paramètres pour affiner le comportement du MediaPlayer.</p>
|
||||
<img src="../images/apps-images/mediaplayer-settings.png" alt="mediaplayer-settings.png" />
|
||||
<p>The first batch, <span class="menu">Play mode</span>, is pretty self-explaining. Start playback automatically, close windows when finished or play clips in a loop.</p>
|
||||
<p>Next are different <span class="menu">View options</span>.<br />
|
||||
You can opt to <span class="menu">Use hardware overlay if available</span>, which cuts down CPU usage but only works for one video window and needs a supporting video card driver.<br />
|
||||
You can <span class="menu">Scale movies smoothly</span> (when not in overlay mode) which uses very fast filtering to smooth over otherwise blocky pixels when zooming video or watching in full-screen mode.<br />
|
||||
<span class="menu">Scale controls in full-screen mode</span> if you prefer slightly bigger controls, maybe because you watch the screen from a bit farther away when in full-screen mode.<br />
|
||||
Then there are settings for <span class="menu">Subtitle size</span> and <span class="menu">Subtitle placement</span>. They can be shown at the <span class="menu">Bottom of video</span>, which will always have them overlayed over the picture. Or <span class="menu">Bottom of window</span>, which allows you to resize the window vertically and have the subtitles appear in the black bar at the bottom instead.</p>
|
||||
<p>The last setting determines the volume of clips whose windows are not currently active. You can have them all blaring at <span class="menu">Full volume</span>, at less confusing <span class="menu">Low volume</span> or quietly <span class="menu">Muted</span>.</p>
|
||||
<p>Le premier groupe, "Mode de Lecture" (<span class="menu">Play mode</span>), est assez explicite. Vous pouvez lancer la lecture automatiquement, fermer les fenêtres lorsque la lecture s'achève ou lire des clips en boucle.</p>
|
||||
<p>Suivent différentes options de visualisation (<span class="menu">View options</span>).<br />
|
||||
Vous pouvez choisir d'utiliser le recouvrement vidéo matériel. Si cette fonction est disponible, ça réduit l'utilisation du processeur mais ça ne fonctionne que pour une seule fenêtre vidéo et requière certaines aptitudes du pilote vidéo.<br />
|
||||
Vous pouvez <span class="menu">Redimensionner le film harmonieusement</span> (<span class="menu">Scale movies smoothly</span>) afin d'appliquer un filtre qui lisse l'image en réduisant l'effet de crénelage sur les blocs qui apparaissent quand les pixels sont fortement agrandis.<br />
|
||||
Si vous préférez des contrôles un peu plus grand, vous pouvez les redimensionner en mode plein écran (<span class="menu">Scale controls in full-screen mode</span>) quand vous regardez la vidéo d'un peu plus loin<br />
|
||||
Puis viennent les réglages de la taille des sous-titres (<span class="menu">Subtitle size</span>) et leur emplacement (<span class="menu">Subtitle placement</span>). Ils peuvent être affichés au bas de la vidéo <span class="menu">Bottom of video</span>, ce qui les fera recouvrir une partie de la vidéo, ou au dessous de la fenêtre (<span class="menu">Bottom of window</span>), ce qui vous permettra de redimensionner la fenêtre afin que les sous-titres apparaissent dans la zone noire en dessous.</p>
|
||||
<p>Le dernier réglage détermine le volume des clips dont les fenêtres sont en arrière plan. Vous pouvez les faire toutes hurler à plein volume (<span class="menu">Full volume</span>), réduire leur volume (<span class="menu">Low volume</span>) pour moins de confusion ou les mettre en sourdine (<span class="menu">Muted</span>) pour plus de tranquillité.</p>
|
||||
|
||||
<h2>Contrôles au clavier</h2>
|
||||
<p>MediaPlayer offre des combinaisons de touches commodes pour contrôler la lecture sans utiliser la souris.</p>
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -49,7 +49,6 @@
|
||||
|
||||
<div id="content">
|
||||
<div>
|
||||
<div class="box-info">Cette page n'est pas encore entièrement traduite. Les parties non encore traduites seront en anglais.</div>
|
||||
|
||||
<h2><img src="../../images/apps-images/showimage-icon_64.png" alt="showimage-icon_64.png" width="64" height="64" />ShowImage</h2>
|
||||
<table summary="layout" border="0" cellspacing="0" cellpadding="2">
|
||||
@@ -63,13 +62,16 @@ ShowImage fournit un minimum de fonctionnalités d'édition pour recadrer, faire
|
||||
<h2><a href="#"><img src="../../images/up.png" style="border:none;float:right" alt="index" /></a>Visualisation</h2>
|
||||
<img src="../images/apps-images/showimage-view.jpg" alt="showimage-view.jpg" />
|
||||
<p>Le menu <span class="menu">View</span> (Affichage) propose de lancer un diaporama de toutes les images d'un dossier (ou d'un résultat de requête) suivant une vitesse de défilement (<span class="menu">Slide delay</span>) de 2 à 20 secondes.</p>
|
||||
<p>Other commands apply to the currently displayed image (without changing the size of the window):<br />
|
||||
<span class="menu">Original size</span> shows the image with a 100% zoom factor.<br />
|
||||
<span class="menu">Fit to window</span> shrinks the image back into the window fame, e.g. after having zoomed into it or after resizing the window.<br />
|
||||
<span class="menu">Zoom in</span> and <span class="menu">Zoom out</span> move into and out of the image in 10% steps. Zooming is also done with the mouse wheel; to pan an image bigger than the window, simply left-click and drag your mouse around.</p>
|
||||
<p>Two settings don't just apply to the currently displayed image and are remembered when browsing from one image to the next:<br />
|
||||
<span class="menu">High quality zooming</span> applies a very fast filter when zooming to reduce jagged lines and produce a smoother result.<br />
|
||||
<span class="menu">Stretch to window</span> will stretch smaller images to fill the current window frame.</p>
|
||||
<p>D'autres commandes s'appliquent à l'image actuellement affichée (sans changer la taille de la fenêtre) :<br />
|
||||
Taille originale (<span class="menu">Original size</span>) affiche l'image à sa taille réelle, sans aucun facteur de zoom.<br />
|
||||
Ajuster à la fenêtre (<span class="menu">Fit to window</span>) réduit l'image à l'espace disponible dans la fenêtre, par exemple, après avoir zoomé ou redimensionné la fenêtre.<br />
|
||||
Zoom avant (<span class="menu">Zoom in</span>) et Zoom arrière (<span class="menu">Zoom out</span>) grossit ou réduit l'image par pas de 10%. Le zoom peut aussi être effectué avec la molette de la souris.<br />
|
||||
Pour recadrer une image plus grande que la fenêtre, il suffit maintenir le bouton gauche de la souris pendant que vous la déplacer.</p>
|
||||
<p>Deux réglages ne concernent pas uniquement l'image en cours, mais sont mémorisés quand vous naviguer d'une image à l'autre :<br />
|
||||
le <span class="menu">Zoom haute qualité
|
||||
</span> (<span class="menu">High quality zooming</span>) applique un filtre très rapide pour lisser les effets de crénelage lors d'un zoom important et améliorer ainsi le rendu de l'image<br />.
|
||||
<span class="menu">Étirer à la fenêtre</span> (<span class="menu">Stretch to window</span>)
|
||||
étendra les images les plus petites pour remplir l'espace disponible dans la fenêtre courante.</p>
|
||||
<p>Ensuite, il y a un mode mode plein écran (<span class="menu">Full screen</span>) dans lequel une option <span class="menu">Show caption in full screen mode</span> recouvre l'image d'une légende affichant le nom du fichier.</p>
|
||||
<p>Enfin, <span class="menu">Show tool bar</span> (afficher la barre d'outils) affiche ou masque les icônes de commandes :</p>
|
||||
<img src="../images/apps-images/showimage-toolbar.png" alt="showimage-toolbar.png" />
|
||||
@@ -82,16 +84,17 @@ ShowImage fournit un minimum de fonctionnalités d'édition pour recadrer, faire
|
||||
<p>Le menu <span class="menu">Browse</span> (parcourir) propose un autre type de parcours : Certains formats d'image, comme le TIFF, peuvent contenir plusieurs pages dans un fichier. Les commandes comme <span class="menu">First page</span> (Première page) et <span class="menu">Next page</span> (Page suivante) vous permettent de naviguer entre ces pages.</p>
|
||||
<h2><a href="#"><img src="../../images/up.png" style="border:none;float:right" alt="index" /></a>Édition</h2>
|
||||
<img src="../images/apps-images/showimage-edit.jpg" alt="showimage-edit.jpg" />
|
||||
<p>The <span class="menu">Image</span> menu offers the few image manipulations necessary for an image viewer: rotating and flipping the image. Note however, that the actual image data won't be changed. Only an attribute is added to the file so it'll be shown rotated or flipped the next time you open it.</p>
|
||||
<p>Le menu <span class="menu">Image</span> vous propose les quelques manipulations d'images nécessaires pour une visionneuse : rotation et retournement de l'image. Notez cependant que les données réelle de l'image ne seront pas modifiées. Seul un attribut est ajouté au fichier de sorte qu'il sera affiché de la même manière à la prochaine ouverture.</p>
|
||||
<p><span class="menu">Use as backgroud...</span> (utiliser comme fond d'écran…) ouvrira les préférences du fond d'écran (<a href="../preferences/backgrounds.html">Backgrounds</a>) ce qui vous permettra de redéfinir l'image de fond de vos espaces de travail avec l'image en cours.</p>
|
||||
<p>Cropping is another feature that's needed sometimes. To define the frame to cut to, you can switch to <span class="menu">Selection mode</span> from the <span class="menu">Edit</span> menu and drag out a box with your left mouse button. If you don't want to change modes first, you can create this box in "normal mode" by simply holding <span class="key">CTRL</span> while left-click-dragging, which otherwise would just pan the image around.<br />
|
||||
<span class="menu">Clear selection</span> or <span class="key">ESC</span> will remove the selection box.</p>
|
||||
<p>Le recadrage est une autre fonction qui peut s'avérer nécessaire. Pour définir le recadrage, vous pouvez passer en "Mode de sélection" (<span class="menu">Selection mode</span>)
|
||||
à partir du menu "Éditer" (<span class="menu">Edit</span>), puis faites glisser la souris avec le bouton gauche enfoncé pour dessiner le nouveau cadre. Si vous ne voulez pas changer de mode avant, vous pouvez créer cette boîte en mode "normal", en maintenant simplement la touche <span class="key">Ctrl</span> et le bouton gauche de la souris enfoncés pendant que vous faites glisser la souris pour dessiner le nouveau cadre. Sans quoi, l'image serait simplement déplacée.<br />
|
||||
<span class="menu">Clear selection</span> (nettoyer la sélection) or <span class="key">Échap</span> supprimeront la boîte de sélection.</p>
|
||||
<p>Le chapitre suivant présente comment sauvegarder cette zone recadrée.</p>
|
||||
<h2><a href="#"><img src="../../images/up.png" style="border:none;float:right" alt="index" /></a>Enregistrement et convertion</h2>
|
||||
<p>To save or convert an image into any available format, you can invoke the normal <span class="menu">Save as...</span> item from the <span class="menu">File</span> menu, select the format and choose a file name.<br />
|
||||
Often quicker, especially when the Tracker window with the destination folder is already open, is using drag & drop.</p>
|
||||
<p>Pour enregistrer ou convertir une image dans l'un des formats disponibles, Il vous suffit d'invoquer l'option "enregistrer sous…" habituel (<span class="menu">Save as…</span>) à partir du menu Fichier (<span class="menu">File</span>), sélectionnez le format et choisissiez un nom de fichier.<br />
|
||||
Vous pouvez aussi faire glisser la sélection et la déposer sur un dossier de destination. Cette dernière méthode est souvent plus rapide, en particulier quand le dossier de destination est déjà ouvert dans une fenêtre du Tracker.</p>
|
||||
<img src="../images/apps-images/showimage-dnd.jpg" alt="showimage-dnd.jpg" />
|
||||
<p>This is also how the above mentioned cropping is finalized. Either select a frame as described above, or choose <span class="menu">Edit | Select all</span> for the whole image. Then drag & drop the selection onto the Desktop or any Tracker window to create a new image clipping in the same format of the original image.</p>
|
||||
<p>C'est aussi comme cela que l'on finalise le recadrage mentionné ci-dessus. Sélectionnez un cadre tel que décrit ci-dessus, ou choisissez <span class="menu">Edit | Select all</span> (Modifier | Sélectionner) pour toute l'image, puis faites glisser la sélection et déposez la sur le Bureau ou n'importe quelle fenêtre du Tracker afin de créer un nouvel extrait de image dans le même format que l'original.</p>
|
||||
<p>Pour enregistrer le fichier dans un autre format, faites glisser la sélection avec le bouton droit de la souris et choisissez un format dans le menu contextuel qui apparait lorsque vous déposez l'image.</p>
|
||||
<h2><a href="#"><img src="../../images/up.png" style="border:none;float:right" alt="index" /></a>Raccourcis claviers</h2>
|
||||
<p>Voici une liste des raccourcis les plus utiles :</p>
|
||||
@@ -104,7 +107,7 @@ Often quicker, especially when the Tracker window with the destination folder is
|
||||
<tr><td><span class="key">0</span></td><td></td><td>Taille originale (100% zoom)</td></tr>
|
||||
<tr><td><span class="key">1</span></td><td></td><td>Adapter à la fenêtre</td></tr>
|
||||
<tr><td><span class="key">Alt</span> <span class="key">Entrée</span></td><td></td><td>Basculer un plein écran (tout comme un double-clic)</td></tr>
|
||||
<tr><td><span class="key">Ctrl</span></td><td></td><td>While holding <span class="key">CTRL</span> you can create a selection frame without explicitly switching to selection mode.</td></tr>
|
||||
<tr><td><span class="key">Ctrl</span></td><td></td><td>En maintenant la touche <span class="key">Ctrl</span> enfoncée, vous pouvez créer un cadre de sélection, sans passer explicitement en mode de sélection.</td></tr>
|
||||
</table>
|
||||
|
||||
</div>
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -58,49 +58,50 @@
|
||||
<tr><td></td><td></td><td><span class="path">~/config/settings/WebPositive/Bookmarks</span> - Tous les signets sous forme de fichiers</td></tr>
|
||||
</table>
|
||||
<p><br /></p>
|
||||
<p>WebPositive, ou Web+, est le navigateur natif de Haiku. Une partie de son nom vient du navigateur de BeOS NetPositive, l’autre de son moteur : WebKit. Ce dernier est une bibliothèque de rendu HTML utilisée dans Safari sous Mac OS X, et Google Chrome. Grâce à cette ressource en perpétuelle évolution, Web+ pourra bénéficier des dernières innovations technologiques du Web.</p>
|
||||
<p>WebPositive (ou Web+) est le navigateur natif d'Haiku. Une partie de son nom vient du navigateur NetPositive de BeOS, l’autre de son moteur : WebKit. Ce dernier est une bibliothèque de rendu HTML utilisée dans Safari sous Mac OS X, et Google Chrome. Grâce à cette ressource en perpétuelle évolution, Web+ pourra bénéficier des dernières innovations technologiques du Web.</p>
|
||||
<img src="../images/apps-images/webpositive.png" alt="webpositive.png" />
|
||||
<p>WebPositive's interface is pretty straight forward: Under a menu bar is another bar with buttons to navigate to the previous and next sites in your browsing history, to stop the loading of a page and (optionally) a button to jump to your starting page.<br />
|
||||
Then comes the locator field to enter a site's URL.<br />
|
||||
Below this navigating bar appear the webpages. You can open many pages in parallel by loading them into their own tab.<br />
|
||||
At the bottom of the window is a status bar, showing the URL of the site being loaded or of the link the mouse pointer is hovering over. While a page is being loaded, a progress bar appears to the right.</p>
|
||||
<p>L'interface de WebPositive est assez simple : sous la barre de menu, vous trouverez une barre d'outils pour naviguer vers les sites précédents et suivants selon votre historique de navigation, ainsi que des boutons pour arrêter le chargement d'une page et (éventuellement) pour accéder à votre page de d'accueil.<br />
|
||||
Puis vient la zone de l'URL qui situe l'emplacement du site visité.<br />
|
||||
Les pages Web apparaissent sous cette barre de navigation. Vous pouvez ouvrir plusieurs pages en parallèle en les chargeant dans des onglets séparés.<br />
|
||||
Au bas de la fenêtre une barre d'état vous indique l'URL du site en cours de chargement ou la cible du lien survolé par le pointeur de la souris. Si une page est en cours de chargement, un indicateur de progression s'affiche à droite.</p>
|
||||
<h2><a href="#"><img src="../../images/up.png" style="border:none;float:right" alt="index" /></a>Réglages</h2>
|
||||
<p>From the <span class="menu">Window</span> menu you can open a <span class="menu">Settings</span> panel to configure a few essentials of WebPositive.</p>
|
||||
<p>À partir du menu "Fenêtre" (<span class="menu">Window</span>), vous pouvez ouvrir le panneau de "réglage" (<span class="menu">Settings</span>) pour configurer les paramètres élémentaires de WebPositive.</p>
|
||||
<img src="../images/apps-images/webpositive-settings.png" alt="webpositive-settings.png" />
|
||||
<p>The first tab deals with general settings: What file or URL serves as a <span class="menu">Start page</span>, what's used as a <span class="menu">Search page</span>, what <span class="menu">Download folder</span> is used for stuff you get from the net.<br />
|
||||
Two pop-up menus let you decide what page to load - if any - when opening a new window or tab.<br />
|
||||
Via the following checkboxes you can avoid showing the tab bar when there's only one page open anyway. WebPositive's interface can be told to automatically hide in full screen mode, and the mouse pointer can be automatically hidden whenever it's not moved for a while.<br />
|
||||
Finally, you can decide to include the "Home" button in the navigation bar and set the number of days the browser remembers the sites you have visited in its history.</p>
|
||||
<p>In the second tab you can choose the fonts used for standard, serif, non-serif and monospaced fonts and set their default sizes.</p>
|
||||
<p>Dans le deuxième onglet, vous pouvez choisir
|
||||
les polices à utiliser en standard, avec empattements, sans empattements ou à espacement fixe et définir leurs tailles par défaut.</p>
|
||||
<p>Le dernier onglet permet de configurer un serveur proxy.</p>
|
||||
<h2><a href="#"><img src="../../images/up.png" style="border:none;float:right" alt="index" /></a>Naviguer</h2>
|
||||
<p>If you have used any browser before, WebPositive shouldn't provide too many surprises. Instead of going through every menu item and feature, let's have a look at just a few points.</p>
|
||||
<p>Si vous avez utilisé d'autres navigateurs avant, WebPositive ne devrait pas trop vous dérouter. Plutôt que de passer chaque fonctionnalité ou élément de menu en revue, nous allons jeter un œil sur quelques points.</p>
|
||||
<ul>
|
||||
<li><img src="../images/apps-images/webpositive-tabbar.png" alt="webpositive-tabbar.png" />
|
||||
<p>New tabs are created with the <span class="key">+</span> button to the right in the tab bar or, if there's still enough space, by double-clicking into an empty area of it. If there are more tabs open than fit into the bar, the <span class="key"><</span> <span class="key">></span> scroll-buttons become active, allowing you to scroll the tab bar left and right. The <span class="key">∨</span> button to the far right hosts a pop-up menu with all open tabs for even quicker navigation.</p></li>
|
||||
<li><p>Clicking on a link with the middle mouse button opens the page in a new tab in the background.</p></li>
|
||||
<li><p>Vous pouvez ouvrir un lien dans un nouvel onglet en arrière-plan en cliquant dessus avec le bouton central de la souris.</p></li>
|
||||
<li><p>From the <span class="menu">View</span> menu you can <span class="menu">Zoom in</span> and <span class="menu">Zoom out</span> of a page. There's also an option to <span class="menu">Zoom text only</span>, leaving all images with their original size.</p></li>
|
||||
<li><p>If you switch to full screen mode and have activated the setting to hide the interface, it will disappear after a second. To slide it temporarily back in, simply move the mouse pointer to the top of the screen.</p></li>
|
||||
<li><p>Si vous passez en mode plein écran et que vous avez réglé l'interface pour qu'elle se masque automatiquement, elle disparaîtra après une seconde. Pour la faire réapparaitre temporairement, déplacez simplement le pointeur de la souris vers le haut de l'écran.</p></li>
|
||||
<li><img src="../images/apps-images/webpositive-locator.png" alt="webpositive-locator.png" />
|
||||
<p>While you type in the locator text field, the browser matches the string to sites you have visited in the past and lists them below the text field. You either keep adding more letters to shorten the list of possible sites, or choose an entry with <span class="key">↑</span> or <span class="key">↓</span>. <span class="key">ENTER</span> will load the page. You can also use the button to the far right which also serves to reload a page.<br />
|
||||
Strings not recognized as URLs will get looked up with Google, so the locator field doubles as quick shortcut to web searches.</p></li>
|
||||
<li><p>Right-clicking opens a context menu which, depending on the object you've clicked on, offers to open the link in a new window or a new tab, download the object etc.</p></li>
|
||||
<li><p><span class="menu">Edit | Find</span> shows a find bar at the bottom to start an in-page search. Matches are highlighted in the page.</p></li>
|
||||
<li><p>Un clic droit ouvre un menu contextuel qui vous propose, selon l'objet sur lequel vous avez cliqué, de télécharger l'objet, ou d'ouvrir le lien dans une nouvelle fenêtre ou un nouvel onglet.</p></li>
|
||||
<li><p><span class="menu">Edit | Find</span> (Éditer | Rechercher) affiche une barre de recherche en bas de la fenêtre pour examiner le contenu de la page. Les correspondances trouvées dans la page apparaitront en surbrillance.</p></li>
|
||||
</ul>
|
||||
<div class="box-info">After a while you may experience web pages being loaded slower and slower. Not really a bug in the truest sense, it's more an effect of a deficient handling of cookies. Either way, until that is fixed you'll have to manually intervene: Have a look at <span class="path">~/config/settings/WebPositive/Cookies.curl</span>. This file stores cookies from webpages and slowly grows while surfing the web. Once it's a few dozen kilobytes in size, it starts to slow down browsing. Just delete the file at that point to start with a clean slate.</div>
|
||||
<h2><a href="#"><img src="../../images/up.png" style="border:none;float:right" alt="index" /></a>Signets</h2>
|
||||
<p>WebPositive's bookmarks are managed as files and folders in <tt>~/config/settings/WebPositive/Bookmarks/</tt>. Adding a bookmark will create a new file there. You can quickly open the folder with <span class="menu">Manage Bookmarks...</span>.</p>
|
||||
<p>Les signets sont gérés sous la forme de fichiers et de dossiers dans <tt>~/config/settings/WebPositive/Bookmarks/</tt>. L'ajout d'un signet créera un nouveau fichier à cet endroit. Vous pouvez ouvrir rapidement le dossier avec <span class="menu">Manage Bookmarks…</span> (Gérer les signets).</p>
|
||||
<img src="../images/apps-images/webpositive-bookmarks.png" alt="webpositive-bookmarks" />
|
||||
<p>You can change a bookmark's URL, name, title and enter keywords just like with any other file with attributes. Just make sure you have all their columns displayed via Tracker's <span class="menu">Attributes</span> menu, then select a file, press <span class="key">ALT</span> <span class="key">E</span> and start editing the attribute; change attribute columns with <span class="key">TAB</span>.<br />You can sort bookmarks into different folders you create yourself.</p>
|
||||
<p>Vous pouvez modifier l'URL d'un signet, son nom, son titre, et associer des mots clés comme avec tout autre fichier avec des attributs. Assurez-vous que toutes les colonnes soient affichées via le menu <span class="menu">Attributes</span> (Attributs) du Tracker, puis sélectionnez un fichier, appuyez sur <span class="key">ALT</span> <span class="key">E</span> pour éditez l'attribut. Vous pouvez changer de colonne avec <span class="key">TAB</span>.<br />Vous pouvez organiser les signets dans les différents dossiers que vous avez créés.</p>
|
||||
<p>By using Tracker to manage and navigate bookmarks you can lift its unique features to quickly find what you're looking for.<br />
|
||||
Activating <span class="menu">Type-ahead filtering</span> in <a href="../tracker.html#tracker-preferences">Tracker's preferences</a>, you can instantly trim down your list of bookmarks to matches of your filter-string. A few more <span class="key">↑</span> or <span class="key">↓</span> to move the selection and pressing <span class="key">ENTER</span> opens the site. Make sure to display all attribute columns to have the filter applied to name, title, URL and keywords.</p>
|
||||
<p>For this to work, all bookmarks should be kept in the <tt>~/config/settings/WebPositive/Bookmarks/</tt> folder and only copies should be sorted into custom subfolders for usage in WebPositive's <span class="menu">Bookmarks</span> menu (if at all). Also, actually filling the keywords attribute helps...</p>
|
||||
<p>Pour que ceci fonctionne, tous les signets doivent êtres conservés dans le dossier <tt>~/config/settings/WebPositive/Bookmarks/</tt>, et seules les copies devraient être organisées dans des sous-dossiers personnalisés pour une utilisation dans le menu <span class="menu">Bookmarks</span> (Signets) de WebPositive. Renseigner l'attribut des mots-clés aide aussi…</p>
|
||||
<h2><a href="#"><img src="../../images/up.png" style="border:none;float:right" alt="index" /></a>Téléchargements</h2>
|
||||
<p><span class="menu">Window | Downloads</span> opens a window listing all past and ongoing downloads:</p>
|
||||
<p><span class="menu">Window | Downloads</span> (Fenêtre | téléchargements) ouvre une fenêtre qui liste tous les téléchargements terminés ou en cours :</p>
|
||||
<img src="../images/apps-images/webpositive-downloads.png" alt="webpositive-downloads.png" />
|
||||
<p>Currently downloading files are shown with a growing progress bar and, similar to copying files in Tracker, information on the download speed, file size and expected finishing time. Buttons to the right let you <span class="button">Cancel</span> and <span class="button">Restart</span> a download, or <span class="button">Open</span> the file, or <span class="button">Remove</span> its entry from the list. The <span class="button">Remove missing</span> and <span class="button">Remove finished</span> buttons at the bottom do this for all entries in this list. "Missing" are files that were deleted in the meantime.</p>
|
||||
<p>Moving a file that is currently being downloaded to Trash will stop the download. You'll also notice, that its icon becomes "ghosted".<br />
|
||||
Generally, WebPositive is very tolerant when it comes to managing files with Tracker. Files can be renamed or moved even while they are being downloaded and even after the download is finished, these changes are reflected in the Downloads window.</p>
|
||||
<p>Envoyer à la corbeille un fichier en cours de téléchargement, arrêtera ce téléchargement, et vous remarquerez que son icône devient «fantôme».<br />
|
||||
En règle générale, WebPositive est très tolérant quand il s'agit de gérer des fichiers avec le Tracker. Les fichiers peuvent être renommés ou déplacés alors même qu'ils sont en cours de téléchargement. Même les modifications apportées après la fin du téléchargement seront répercutées dans la fenêtre des Téléchargements.</p>
|
||||
<div class="box-info"><p>Ever wondered from what site you downloaded a particular package, image or any other file? You can track that down by opening the file with <a href="diskprobe.html">DiskProbe</a> and have a look at its <tt>META:url</tt> attribute.</p>
|
||||
<p>Want to have the URL permanently shown in your downloads folder? Just copy a bookmark into it, have the bookmark's URL attribute column displayed and remove the bookmark again.</p></div>
|
||||
<h2><a href="#"><img src="../../images/up.png" style="border:none;float:right" alt="index" /></a>Raccourcis claviers</h2>
|
||||
@@ -110,11 +111,11 @@ Generally, WebPositive is very tolerant when it comes to managing files with Tra
|
||||
<tr><td><span class="key">Alt</span> <span class="key">W</span></td><td> </td><td>Ferme l'onglet actif.</td></tr>
|
||||
<tr><td><span class="key">Alt</span> <span class="key">N</span></td><td> </td><td>Ouvre une nouvelle fenêtre.</td></tr>
|
||||
<tr><td><span class="key">MAJ</span> <span class="key">ALT</span> <span class="key">W</span></td><td> </td><td>Ferme la fenêtre courante.</td></tr>
|
||||
<tr><td><span class="key">Alt</span> <span class="key">Entrée</span></td><td> </td><td>Toggles full screen mode.</td></tr>
|
||||
<tr><td><span class="key">Alt</span> <span class="key">Entrée</span></td><td> </td><td>Bascule en mode plein écran.</td></tr>
|
||||
<tr><td><span class="key">Alt</span> <span class="key">R</span> ou <span class="key">F5</span></td><td> </td><td>Rafraîchi la page courante.</td></tr>
|
||||
<tr><td><span class="key">Alt</span> <span class="key">H</span></td><td> </td><td>Opens the home page.</td></tr>
|
||||
<tr><td><span class="key">Alt</span> <span class="key">H</span></td><td> </td><td>Ouvre la page d'accueil.</td></tr>
|
||||
<tr><td><span class="key">Alt</span> <span class="key">D</span></td><td> </td><td>Affiche ou masque la fenêtre des téléchargements.</td></tr>
|
||||
<tr><td><span class="key">Alt</span> <span class="key">F</span></td><td> </td><td>Shows the find bar for in-page searching (hide with <span class="key">ESC</span>).</td></tr>
|
||||
<tr><td><span class="key">Alt</span> <span class="key">F</span></td><td> </td><td>Affiche la barre de recherche pour examiner le contenu de la page (Utilisez <span class="key">ESC</span> pour la masquer).</td></tr>
|
||||
<tr><td><span class="key">Alt</span> <span class="key">B</span></td><td> </td><td>Place un signet sur cette page.</td></tr>
|
||||
<tr><td><span class="key">Alt</span> <span class="key">M</span></td><td> </td><td>Gérer les signets via l'ouverture du dossier des signets.</td></tr>
|
||||
<tr><td><span class="key">Alt</span> <span class="key">←</span></td><td> </td><td>Page précédente dans l'historique.</td></tr>
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -62,7 +62,7 @@
|
||||
|
||||
<h1>Deskbar</h1>
|
||||
|
||||
<p>La Deskbar est le petit panneau qui se trouve par défaut dans le coin supérieur droit de l'écran. C'est la version Haiku de la barre des tâches Windows avec le bouton Démarrer. Elle contient menu Deskbar, d'où vous pouvez lancer les applications et les préférences, dessous, un cartouche héberge une horloge ainsi que d'autres outils, et en bas, la liste des programmes en cours.</p>
|
||||
<p>La Deskbar est le petit panneau qui se trouve par défaut dans le coin supérieur droit de l'écran. C'est la version Haiku de la barre des tâches Windows avec le bouton Démarrer. Elle contient le menu de la Deskbar, d'où vous pouvez lancer les applications et les préférences, en dessous, un cartouche héberge une horloge ainsi que d'autres outils, et en bas, la liste des programmes en cours.</p>
|
||||
<img src="../images/deskbar-images/positions.png" alt="positions" />
|
||||
<p>Vous pouvez déplacer la Deskbar dans l'un des coins ou le long d'une bordure de l'écran en la saisissant par la zone d'accroche qui se trouve à coté du cartouche. Vous pouvez aussi la réduire en une présentation plus compacte en faisant glisser zone d'accroche sur le menu de la Deskbar.</p>
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -123,8 +123,8 @@ Quand vous faites passer la souris au dessus de l'heure, La date est affichée d
|
||||
<a href="#"><img src="../images/up.png" style="border:none;float:right" alt="index" /></a>
|
||||
<a id="list-of-apps" name="list-of-apps">La liste des programmes en cours</a></h2>
|
||||
<img src="images/deskbar-images/list-of-apps.png" alt="list-of-apps.png" />
|
||||
<p>Vous pouvez changer pour une application spécifique en cours d'exécution en cliquant sur son entrée dans la barre de Bureau et de choisir une de ses fenêtres, dans le sous-menu. Par un clic droit vous pouvez réduire ou fermer une fenêtre ou l'application entière.</p>
|
||||
<p>Si vous avez activé l'élargissement (Application Expanders) dans les paramètres de la Deskbar, vous pouvez agrandir / réduire les fenêtres directement dans la liste sous l'entrée d'une application.</p>
|
||||
<p>Vous pouvez basculer vers l'une des autres applications ouvertes en cliquant sur son entrée dans la Deskbar, puis en choisissant dans le sous-menu, une de ses fenêtres. D'un clic droit vous pouvez réduire ou fermer une fenêtre ou l'application entière.</p>
|
||||
<p>Si vous avez activé l'élargissement (Application Expanders) dans les paramètres de la Deskbar, vous pouvez agrandir / réduire les fenêtres directement dans la liste sous l'entrée de l'application.</p>
|
||||
<p>En face de chaque fenêtre, on trouve un symbole qui fourni des informations sur son état. Un symbole lumineux signifie qu'une fenêtre est visible, un sombre qu'elle est minimisée. Trois lignes devant le symbole indique que ce n'est pas sur l'espace de travail actuel.</p>
|
||||
|
||||
</div>
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -4,7 +4,7 @@
|
||||
<head>
|
||||
<!--
|
||||
*
|
||||
* Copyright 2008, Haiku. All rights reserved.
|
||||
* Copyright 2008-2011, Haiku. All rights reserved.
|
||||
* Distributed under the terms of the MIT License.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* Authors:
|
||||
@@ -66,7 +66,15 @@
|
||||
<li><p>Le bouton "zoom" (ou <span class="key">CTRL</span> <span class="key">CMD</span> <span class="key">Z</span>). Dans la plupart des applications, il élargira une fenêtre à la taille maximale. Cependant ce n'est pas obligatoire. La fenêtre du Tracker, par exemple, sera retaillée au mieux de son contenu.</p></li>
|
||||
<li><p>Le coin de redimensionnement. Tirer la bordure d'une fenêtre d'un autre endroit déplacera la fenêtre.</p></li>
|
||||
</ol>
|
||||
<div class="box-info">Tout en pressant <span class="key">CTRL</span> <span class="key">ALT</span>, vous pouvez cliquer n'importe où dans une fenêtre avec le bouton gauche de la souris pour la déplacer alors que le bouton droit de la souris l'enverra à l'arrière plan.</div>
|
||||
|
||||
<h2><a href="#"><img src="../images/up.png" style="border:none;float:right" alt="index" /></a>
|
||||
<a id="move-resize" name="move-resize">Une manière rapide de déplacer ou redimensionner les fenêtres</a></h2>
|
||||
<p>Le déplacement et le redimensionnement des fenêtres est une partie importante de l’interaction avec les applications qui s'exécutent simultanément. Plutôt que de viser le petit onglet jaune du titre, ou la bordure de fenêtre encore plus fine, il existe un moyen plus pratique pour déplacer une fenêtre. De même, le petit coin de redimensionnement a une autre limitation : Il permet seulement un redimensionnement de l'angle inférieur droit.</p>
|
||||
<p>Pour répondre à ces questions, Haiku fournit une solution élégante pour manipuler les fenêtres à l'aide de la combinaison des touches <span class="key">CTRL</span> <span class="key">ALT</span> et la souris. Référez-vous au chapitre <a href="keyboard-shortcuts.html#general">Raccourcis claviers</a> pour d'autres combinaisons
|
||||
de touches concernant la gestion des fenêtres.</p>
|
||||
<img src="images/gui-images/resizing.png" alt="resizing.png" />
|
||||
<p>L’enfoncement des touches <span class="key">CTRL</span> <span class="key">CMD</span> enfoncées mettra en évidence les bordures les plus proches du pointeur de la fenêtre dans laquelle se trouve la souris. Déplacez la souris vers une autre bordure pour changer de cible. Cliquez avec le <i>bouton droit de la souris</i> puis faites la glisser pour redimensionner la fenêtre au niveau des bordure en surbrillance.</p>
|
||||
<p>En maintenant les touches <span class="key">CTRL</span> <span class="key">CMD</span> enfoncées, cliquez avec le <i>bouton gauche de souris</i> n'importe où dans une fenêtre, puis faites glisser la souris pour déplacer la fenêtre. Un simple clic avec le <i>bouton droit de la souris</i> envoie la fenêtre en arrière plan.</p>
|
||||
|
||||
<h2>
|
||||
<a href="#"><img src="../images/up.png" style="border:none;float:right" alt="index" /></a>
|
||||
|
||||
|
After Width: | Height: | Size: 9.0 KiB |
|
After Width: | Height: | Size: 7.5 KiB |
|
After Width: | Height: | Size: 6.1 KiB |
|
After Width: | Height: | Size: 5.3 KiB |
|
After Width: | Height: | Size: 8.9 KiB |
@@ -4,7 +4,7 @@
|
||||
<head>
|
||||
<!--
|
||||
*
|
||||
* Copyright 2008-2010, Haiku. All rights reserved.
|
||||
* Copyright 2008-2011, Haiku. All rights reserved.
|
||||
* Distributed under the terms of the MIT License.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* Authors:
|
||||
@@ -64,17 +64,20 @@
|
||||
<table summary="shortcuts" border="0" cellspacing="0" cellpadding="4">
|
||||
<tr><td><span class="key">CMD</span> <span class="key">Fx</span></td><td style="width:15px;"></td><td>Passe à l’<a href="workspaces.html">espace de travail</a> X (<span class="key">Fx</span> est la touche de fonction correspondant à cet espace de travail). Pressez en plus <span class="key">MAJ</span> pour y déplacer la fenêtre active.</td></tr>
|
||||
<tr><td class="onelinetop"><span class="key">CTRL</span> <span class="key">CMD</span> <span class="key">←</span>/<span class="key">→</span>/<span class="key">↑</span>/<span class="key">↓</span></td><td></td><td>Se déplace entre les lignes/colonnes des espaces de travail disponibles. Comme ci-dessus, utilisez <span class="key">MAJ</span> pour déplacer la fenêtre active.</td></tr>
|
||||
<tr><td><span class="key">CTRL</span> <span class="key">CMD</span> + left mouse</td><td></td><td>cliquez avec le bouton gauche de la souris et faites glisser pour déplacer une fenêtre (voir le chapitre sur l'<a href="gui.html#move-resize">Interface graphique</a>).</td></tr>
|
||||
<tr><td><span class="key">CTRL</span> <span class="key">CMD</span> + right mouse</td><td></td><td>cliquez avec le bouton droit de la souris et faites glisser pour redimensionner une fenêtre (voir le chapitre sur l'<a href="gui.html#move-resize">Interface graphique</a>).</td></tr>
|
||||
<tr><td><span class="key">CTRL</span> <span class="key">CMD</span> <span class="key">Z</span></td><td></td><td>Maximise une fenêtre à sa taille alternative (souvent la taille maximale dans la majorité des applications).</td></tr>
|
||||
<tr><td><span class="key">CTRL</span> <span class="key">CMD</span> <span class="key">M</span></td><td></td><td>Minimise la fenêtre active.</td></tr>
|
||||
<tr><td><span class="key">CTRL</span> <span class="key">CMD</span> <span class="key">H</span></td><td></td><td>Cache (minimise) toutes les fenêtres de l'application active.</td></tr>
|
||||
<tr><td><span class="key">CTRL</span> <span class="key">CMD</span> <span class="key">F</span></td><td></td><td>Place la fenêtre active (qui a le focus) au premier plan (utilisable uniquement avec l’option « <a href="preferences/mouse.html">Focus Follows Mouse</a> »).</td></tr>
|
||||
<tr><td><span class="key">CTRL</span> <span class="key">CMD</span> <span class="key">B</span></td><td></td><td>Envoie la fenêtre active en arrière-plan.</td></tr>
|
||||
<tr><td><span class="key">CTRL</span> <span class="key">TAB</span></td><td></td><td>Pressez cette touche pour activer le <a href="twitcher.html">Twitcher</a>.</td></tr>
|
||||
<tr><td><span class="key">CTRL</span> <span class="key">CMD</span> <span class="key">DEL</span></td><td></td><td>Ouvre le <a href="teammonitor.html">Team Monitor</a>.</td></tr>
|
||||
<tr><td><span class="key">CMD</span> <span class="key">ESC</span></td><td></td><td>Active la barre de menu (pour en sortir, tapez <span class="key">ESC</span>).</td></tr>
|
||||
<tr><td><span class="key">CMD</span> <span class="key">C</span></td><td></td><td>Copie la sélection dans le presse-papier.</td></tr>
|
||||
<tr><td><span class="key">CMD</span> <span class="key">X</span></td><td></td><td>Coupe la sélection pour la placer dans le presse-papier.</td></tr>
|
||||
<tr><td><span class="key">CMD</span> <span class="key">V</span></td><td></td><td>Colle le contenu du presse-papier.</td></tr>
|
||||
<tr><td><span class="key">Alt</span> <span class="key">W</span></td><td></td><td>Ferme la fenêtre active.</td></tr><tr><td><span class="key">CTRL</span> <span class="key">CMD</span> <span class="key">Z</span></td><td></td><td>Maximise une fenêtre à sa taille alternative (souvent la taille maximale dans la majorité des applications).</td></tr>
|
||||
<tr><td><span class="key">CTRL</span> <span class="key">CMD</span> <span class="key">M</span></td><td></td><td>Minimise la fenêtre active.</td></tr>
|
||||
<tr><td><span class="key">CTRL</span> <span class="key">CMD</span> <span class="key">H</span></td><td></td><td>Cache (minimise) toutes les fenêtres de l'application active.</td></tr>
|
||||
<tr><td><span class="key">CTRL</span> <span class="key">CMD</span> <span class="key">F</span></td><td></td><td>Place la fenêtre active (qui a le focus) au premier plan (utilisable uniquement avec l’option « <a href="preferences/mouse.html">Focus Follows Mouse</a> »).</td></tr>
|
||||
<tr><td><span class="key">CTRL</span> <span class="key">CMD</span> <span class="key">B</span></td><td></td><td>Envoie la fenêtre active en arrière-plan.</td></tr>
|
||||
<tr><td><span class="key">Alt</span> <span class="key">W</span></td><td></td><td>Ferme la fenêtre active.</td></tr>
|
||||
<tr><td><span class="key">CMD</span> <span class="key">Q</span></td><td></td><td>Quitte une application.</td></tr>
|
||||
<tr><td><span class="key">IMPR</span></td><td style="width:15px;"></td><td>Capture l'écran sans aucun délai, et affiche la fenêtre <a href="applications/screenshot.html">Screenshot</a>.</td></tr>
|
||||
<tr><td class="onelinetop"><span class="key">MAJ</span> <span class="key">IMPR</span></td><td></td><td>Capture l'écran en silence (sans ouvrir de fenêtre), tout en respectant les derniers réglages utilisés.</td></tr>
|
||||
@@ -124,7 +127,8 @@
|
||||
<tr><td><span class="key">CMD</span></td><td></td><td>Ajoute ou retire l'élément sur lequel vous cliquez de la sélection.</td></tr>
|
||||
</table>
|
||||
<p>Dans une fenêtre Tracker, si vous commencer à taper un nom, le premier fichier correspondant à ce que vous avez tapé sera sélectionné. Si il n’y a pas de fichiers dont le nom commence par votre chaîne de recherche, le premier fichier à contenir cette chaîne dans son nom ou ses attributs sera sélectionné. Cette recherche <i>n’est pas</i> sensible à la casse.<br />
|
||||
Les lettres que vous tapez apparaîtront en bas à gauche de la fenêtre, là ou est normalement affiché le nombre d’éléments. Après une seconde, il repassera en mode normal et vous pourrez commencer une nouvelle recherche.</p>
|
||||
Les lettres que vous tapez apparaîtront en bas à gauche de la fenêtre, là ou est normalement affiché le nombre d’éléments. Après une seconde, il repassera en mode normal et vous pourrez commencer une nouvelle recherche.<br />
|
||||
Au lieu de sauter sur la première occurrence de la chaîne recherchée, Le Tracker peut être configuré pour filtrer tous les fichiers qui n'y correspondent pas (référez vous au filtrage progessif dans les <a href="tracker.html#tracker-preferences">préférences</a> du Tracker).</p>
|
||||
|
||||
</div>
|
||||
</div>
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -12,6 +12,7 @@
|
||||
* Translators:
|
||||
* Vincent Duvert
|
||||
* Loïc
|
||||
* Humdinger
|
||||
*
|
||||
-->
|
||||
<meta http-equiv="content-type" content="text/html; charset=utf-8" />
|
||||
@@ -76,7 +77,7 @@ Hinting de glyphes</h3>
|
||||
<p>Si activé, <span class="menu">Hinting de glyphes</span> aligne les lettres de manière à ce que leurs bords horizontaux soient situés entre deux pixels. Ceci permet un meilleur contraste, en particulier pour le texte en noir sur blanc. Ce dernier apparaît plus net. Le réglage "<span class="menu">Fontes en pas fixe seulement</span>" est spécialement utile pour les écrans à base résolution comme ceux des netbooks. Sur ceux ci le hinting peut donner un mauvais résultats avec des polices de petite taille, mais avec ce réglage vous pourrez conserver les avantages du hinting dans les éditeurs de texte et le Terminal.</p>
|
||||
<p>Voyez les différences induites par le hinting entre ces deux captures d'écrans agrandies :</p>
|
||||
<table summary="layout" border="0" cellspacing="0" cellpadding="2">
|
||||
<tr><td style="text-align:center; font-style:italic"><img src="../../images/prefs-images/appearance-glyph-off.png" alt="appearance-glyph-off.png" /><br />Hinting désactivé</td><td style="width:15px;"></td><td style="text-align:center; font-style:italic"><img src="../../images/prefs-images/appearance-glyph-on.png" alt="appearance-glyph-on.png" /><br />Hinting activé</td></tr>
|
||||
<tr><td style="text-align:center; font-style:italic"><img src="../images/prefs-images/appearance-glyph-off.png" alt="appearance-glyph-off.png" /><br />Hinting désactivé</td><td style="width:15px;"></td><td style="text-align:center; font-style:italic"><img src="../images/prefs-images/appearance-glyph-on.png" alt="appearance-glyph-on.png" /><br />Hinting activé</td></tr>
|
||||
</table>
|
||||
<p>Notez que ces captures d'écran de l'application <span class="app">Magnify</span> sont bien sûr réalisées avec des réglages de hinting différents. Vous pouvez donc voir l'effet du réglage sur le texte de l'onglet jaune et celui de la fenêtre ("35 x 15 @ 8 pixels/pixel").</p>
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -89,13 +90,13 @@ Il y a deux méthodes:</p>
|
||||
<span class="menu">Sous-pixel LCD</span> donnera un meilleur rendu sur les écrans LCD haute résolution. Au lieu de changer l'intensité du pixel, il change sa couleur, ce qui permet de déplacer le bord d'un élément d'une fraction de pixel (car sur les écrans LCD les composantes rouge, vert et bleu sont séparées).</p>
|
||||
<p>À nouveau, voici les deux méthodes présentées sur deux captures d'écran :</p>
|
||||
<table summary="layout" border="0" cellspacing="0" cellpadding="2">
|
||||
<tr><td style="text-align:center; font-style:italic"><img src="../../images/prefs-images/appearance-glyph-off.png" alt="appearance-glyph-off.png" /><br />Niveaux de gris, hinting désactivé</td><td style="width:15px;"></td><td style="text-align:center; font-style:italic"><img src="../../images/prefs-images/appearance-subpixel.png" alt="appearance-subpixel.png" /><br />LCD subpixel, lissage activé</td></tr>
|
||||
<tr><td style="text-align:center; font-style:italic"><img src="../images/prefs-images/appearance-glyph-off.png" alt="appearance-glyph-off.png" /><br />Niveaux de gris, hinting désactivé</td><td style="width:15px;"></td><td style="text-align:center; font-style:italic"><img src="../images/prefs-images/appearance-subpixel.png" alt="appearance-subpixel.png" /><br />LCD subpixel, lissage activé</td></tr>
|
||||
</table>
|
||||
<p>Le lissage sous-pixel ajoute une bordure colorées aux objets, que vous pourriez ne pas apprécier. Dans Haiku, vous pouvez mélanger les deux méthodes de lissage et trouver le bon réglage pour vous en déplaçant un curseur.</p>
|
||||
<div class="box-info">Le lissage sous-pixel combiné au hinting est soumis à un brevet logiciel et n'est donc pas disponible par défaut. Désolé. En fonction de votre lieu de résidence, vous pourrez peut-être vous procurer une version débridée. Parlez-en à vos représentants.</div>
|
||||
<p>Si vous activez le hinting et le lissage sous-pixel en modifiant les sources de Haiku et en recompilant l'ensemble, voici ce que vous obtiendrez par rapport au hinting avec niveaux de gris :</p>
|
||||
<table summary="layout" border="0" cellspacing="0" cellpadding="2">
|
||||
<tr><td style="text-align:center; font-style:italic"><img src="../../images/prefs-images/appearance-glyph-on.png" alt="appearance-glyph-on.png" /><br />Niveaux de gris, hinting activé</td><td style="width:15px;"></td><td style="text-align:center; font-style:italic"><img src="../../images/prefs-images/appearance-glyph-on-subpixel.png" alt="appearance-glyph-on-subpixel.png" /><br />LCD sous-pixel, hinting activé</td></tr>
|
||||
<tr><td style="text-align:center; font-style:italic"><img src="../images/prefs-images/appearance-glyph-on.png" alt="appearance-glyph-on.png" /><br />Niveaux de gris, hinting activé</td><td style="width:15px;"></td><td style="text-align:center; font-style:italic"><img src="../images/prefs-images/appearance-glyph-on-subpixel.png" alt="appearance-glyph-on-subpixel.png" /><br />LCD sous-pixel, hinting activé</td></tr>
|
||||
</table>
|
||||
<p><br /></p>
|
||||
<p>En bas du panneau, vous trouverez deux boutons :</p>
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -75,8 +75,8 @@ de les trouver, ainsi que de copier, renommer ou supprimer ceux qui existent.</p
|
||||
<a id="mounting-volumes" name="mounting-volumes">Montage des volumes</a></h2>
|
||||
<p>Afin d’accéder un disque dur, CD, clé USB, etc… vous devez d’abord monter le volume, c’est à dire indiquer sa présence au système. Ceci peut s’effectuer par un clic droit sur le Bureau ou sur un disque déjà monté (comme le disque de démarrage) et choisir le volume dans le sous-menu <span class="menu">Mount</span> (Montage). Vous trouverez la même option dans le menu <span class="menu">Mount</span> de la Deskbar.</p>
|
||||
<img src="images/tracker-images/mount-settings.png" alt="drill-down.png" />
|
||||
<p>Vous pouvez également utiliser les réglages de démarrage (<span class="menu">Mount Settings</span>) pour éviter d’avoir à tout monter manuellement à chaque démarrage.<br />
|
||||
Les réglages indiqués ci-dessus provoqueront le montage au démarrage de tous les volumes précédemment montés, et le montage automatique de tout périphérique inséré ou connecté à l’ordinateur.</p>
|
||||
<p>Il existe aussi des réglages (<span class="menu">Settings</span>) qui vous permettent de ne pas avoir à monter tous les disques manuellement à chaque démarrage.<br />
|
||||
Les réglages indiqués ci-dessus provoqueront le montage automatique de tous les disques que vous connecterez ou insérerez dans à l’ordinateur, ainsi que le montage automatique au démarrage de tous les volumes qui étaient montés précédemment.</p>
|
||||
<div class="box-warning">Avant de déconnecter un disque dur externe ou une clée USB, assurez-vous que vous avez démonté le volume correctement. Ceci garantit que le transfert de toutes les données est terminée. Sinon, vous pourriez perdre des données ou corrompre le disque!</div>
|
||||
|
||||
<h2>
|
||||
@@ -146,7 +146,7 @@ Si vous maintenez la touche <span class="key">MAJ</span> enfoncée, le menu devi
|
||||
<li><p><b>Windows</b> (Fenêtres) - Vous pouvez choisir la navigation dans une fenêtre unique (<span class="menu">Single Window Navigation</span>), un double-clique sur un dossier ouvre alors ce dernier dans la fenêtre de son dossier parent plutôt que dans une nouvelle fenêtre. Ce n’est pas tout à fait la même chose que ce qui ce passe lors d’un double clic avec la touche <span class="key">OPT</span> enfoncée en mode normal : Vous perdez la position et la taille enregistrée de la fenêtre.
|
||||
<br /><br /></p>
|
||||
<img src="images/tracker-images/tracker-preferences-navigator.png" alt="tracker-preferences-navigator.png" />
|
||||
<p>Avant de passer le Tracker en mode navigation dans une fenêtre unique, parce que cette méthode vous sembler plus familière, nous vous recommandons d’essayer la navigation par menu, qui peut être bien plus rapide après vous y être habitué. Néanmoins, la navigation dans une fenêtre unique offre un <i>Navigateur</i> où vous pouvez entrer ou copier-coller un chemin de fichier et utiliser des boutons «Précédent», «Suivant» et «Niveau supérieur». Voir <a href="#type-ahead-filter">au-dessus</a>.</p></li>
|
||||
<p>Avant de passer le Tracker en mode navigation dans une fenêtre unique, parce que cette méthode vous semble plus familière, nous vous recommandons d’essayer la navigation par menu, qui peut être bien plus rapide après que vous vous y soyez habitué. Néanmoins, la navigation dans une fenêtre unique offre un <i>Navigateur</i> où vous pouvez entrer ou copier-coller un chemin de fichier et utiliser des boutons «Précédent», «Suivant» et «Niveau supérieur». Voir <a href="#type-ahead-filter">au-dessus</a>.</p></li>
|
||||
<li><p><b>Date and Time</b> (Date et heure) - Règle le format de la date et de l'heure.</p></li>
|
||||
<li><p><b>Trash</b> (Corbeille) - Définit le comportement lors d’une suppression de fichier.</p></li>
|
||||
<li><p><b>Volume Icons</b> (Icônes de volume) - Réglez la couleur d’un éventuel indicateur d’espace libre qui peut être affiché sur chaque icône de disque.</p></li>
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -119,7 +119,7 @@ Altrimenti, è possibile disinstallare un'applicazione, rimuovendo la sua cartel
|
||||
<tr><td style="width:24px;"><img src="../images/apps-images/mediaplayer-icon_16.png" alt="icon" width="16" height="16" /></td><td><a href="applications/mediaplayer.html">MediaPlayer</a></td><td> </td>
|
||||
<td valign="top">A player for all supported audio/video files.</td></tr>
|
||||
<tr><td style="width:24px;"><img src="../images/apps-images/midiplayer-icon_16.png" alt="icon" width="16" height="16" /></td><td><a href="applications/midiplayer.html">MidiPlayer</a></td><td> </td>
|
||||
<td valign="top"><span style="color:silver">Player per file MIDI. [<i>mancante</i>]</span></td></tr>
|
||||
<td valign="top">A player for MIDI files.</td></tr>
|
||||
<tr><td style="width:24px;"><img src="../images/apps-images/packageinstaller-icon_16.png" alt="icon" width="16" height="16" /></td><td><a href="applications/packageinstaller.html">PackageInstaller</a></td><td> </td>
|
||||
<td valign="top"><span style="color:silver">Installer per i pacchetti PKG di BeOS. [<i>mancante</i>]</span></td></tr>
|
||||
<tr><td style="width:24px;"><img src="../images/apps-images/people-icon_16.png" alt="icon" width="16" height="16" /></td><td><a href="applications/people.html">People</a></td><td> </td>
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -208,11 +208,11 @@ Selected points are deleted by pressing <span class="key">DEL</span> or by click
|
||||
<p>Shapes lie on top of each other, each is on its own layer, if you will. To reorder them you drag&drop their entry to a different position in the list.</p>
|
||||
|
||||
<h4><a id="i-o-m-shape-menu" name="i-o-m-path-menu">Shape Menu</a></h4>
|
||||
<p>The <span class="menu">Shape</span> menu offers the before mentioned possibility to <span class="menu">Add Empty, With Path/Style/Path&Style</span> and to <span class="menu">Duplicate</span> or <span class="menu">Remove</span> a shape. Then, there is:</p>
|
||||
<p>The <span class="menu">Shape</span> menu offers the before mentioned possibility to <span class="menu">Add empty, with path/style/path & style</span> and to <span class="menu">Duplicate</span> or <span class="menu">Remove</span> a shape. Then, there is:</p>
|
||||
<table summary="Shape menu" border="0" cellspacing="0" cellpadding="2">
|
||||
<tr><td><span class="menu">Reset Transformation</span></td><td style="width:15px;"></td><td>Reverts all the move, resize and rotate transformations you have applied to the shape.</td></tr>
|
||||
<tr><td class="onelinetop"><span class="menu">Freeze Transformation</span></td><td></td><td>When you transform a shape, its assigned path(s) stay in their original position. This may be intended; maybe more than one shape is using that path, maybe you intentionally used <span class="menu">Options | Snap to Grid</span> to set the points at precise pixel borders.<br />
|
||||
If not, "Freeze Transformation" will apply the current shape transformation to the assigned path(s). A future "Reset Transformation" will then return to this new state.</td></tr>
|
||||
<tr><td class="onelinetop"><span class="menu">Freeze Transformation</span></td><td></td><td>When you transform a shape, its assigned path(s) stay in their original position. This may be intended; maybe more than one shape is using that path, maybe you intentionally used <span class="menu">Options | Snap to grid</span> to set the points at precise pixel borders.<br />
|
||||
If not, "Freeze transformation" will apply the current shape transformation to the assigned path(s). A future "Reset Transformation" will then return to this new state.</td></tr>
|
||||
</table>
|
||||
|
||||
<h4><a id="i-o-m-shape-properties" name="i-o-m-shape-properties">Proprietà delle forme</a></h4>
|
||||
@@ -260,7 +260,7 @@ Of course you can move these indicators to change the gradient to your liking. Y
|
||||
<p>You can move, resize and rotate the representing box of a gradient on the canvas until it fits your needs. This works just like with shapes.</p>
|
||||
|
||||
<h4><a id="i-o-m-style-menu" name="i-o-m-style-menu">Menù Stile</a></h4>
|
||||
<p>The <span class="menu">Style</span> menu offers the usual entries to <span class="menu">Add</span>, <span class="menu">Duplicate</span> or <span class="menu">Remove</span> a style and to <span class="menu">Reset Transformation</span>.</p>
|
||||
<p>The <span class="menu">Style</span> menu offers the usual entries to <span class="menu">Add</span>, <span class="menu">Duplicate</span> or <span class="menu">Remove</span> a style and to <span class="menu">Reset transformation</span>.</p>
|
||||
|
||||
<h4><a id="i-o-m-style-properties" name="i-o-m-style-properties">Proprietà dello Stile</a></h4>
|
||||
<p>The <span class="menu">Name</span> is the only <span class="menu">Properties</span> of a style.</p>
|
||||
@@ -293,9 +293,9 @@ Of course you can move these indicators to change the gradient to your liking. Y
|
||||
<a href="#"><img src="../../images/up.png" style="border:none;float:right" alt="index" /></a>
|
||||
<a id="i-o-m-save" name="i-o-m-save">Salvare un'icona</a></h3>
|
||||
<p>Anche qui in alto c'è la solita barra con <span class="menu">File</span>, <span class="menu">Edit</span>, <span class="menu">Options</span>. L'utilizzo è piuttosto intuitivo, pertanto si presterà attenzione soltanto a come salvare un lavoro.</p>
|
||||
<p><span class="menu">File | Save As...</span> will save in a special Icon-O-Matic format that retains additional information like the names of paths, shapes and styles. These will be stripped from the actual icon once you export it to save space. It's a good idea to back-up your work like this, because without named objects everything's named "<path>/<shape>/<style>" which makes specific changes tedious.</p>
|
||||
<p><span class="menu">File | Save as...</span> will save in a special Icon-O-Matic format that retains additional information like the names of paths, shapes and styles. These will be stripped from the actual icon once you export it to save space. It's a good idea to back-up your work like this, because without named objects everything's named "<path>/<shape>/<style>" which makes specific changes tedious.</p>
|
||||
|
||||
<p><span class="menu">File | Export As...</span> opens a familiar save panel with a file format pop-up menu at the bottom, offering these choices:</p>
|
||||
<p><span class="menu">File | Export as...</span> opens a familiar save panel with a file format pop-up menu at the bottom, offering these choices:</p>
|
||||
<table summary="file formats" border="0" cellspacing="0" cellpadding="2">
|
||||
<tr><td>HVIF</td><td style="width:15px;"></td><td>Haiku Vector Icon Format</td></tr>
|
||||
<tr><td>HVIF RDef</td><td></td><td>Salva come risorsa utilizzata dai programmatori</td></tr>
|
||||
@@ -303,8 +303,8 @@ Of course you can move these indicators to change the gradient to your liking. Y
|
||||
<tr><td>SVG</td><td></td><td>Salva come SVG</td></tr>
|
||||
<tr><td>PNG</td><td></td><td>Salva come PNG di 64px di dimensioni</td></tr>
|
||||
<tr><td>Set di PNG</td><td></td><td>Salva come PNG di 16, 32 e 64px di dimensioni</td></tr>
|
||||
<tr><td>BEOS:ICON Attribute</td><td></td><td>Choose a file and set its icon attribute directly</td></tr>
|
||||
<tr><td>META:ICON Attribute</td><td></td><td>Choose a file and attach the icon as mere meta data</td></tr>
|
||||
<tr><td>BEOS:ICON attribute</td><td></td><td>Choose a file and set its icon attribute directly</td></tr>
|
||||
<tr><td>META:ICON attribute</td><td></td><td>Choose a file and attach the icon as mere meta data</td></tr>
|
||||
</table>
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -114,11 +114,11 @@ Both files can be created in the <span class="path">home/</span> folder and add
|
||||
<a id="hints" name="hints">Hints for working with the Terminal</a></h2>
|
||||
<ul><li><p>Dragging a file or folder from a Tracker window into the Terminal will insert its path at the location of the cursor. Dragging with the right mouse button offers additional actions in a context menu:</p>
|
||||
<table summary="layout" border="0" cellpadding="2" cellspacing="0">
|
||||
<tr><td><span class="menu">Insert Path</span></td><td> </td><td>Inserts the location of the file, same as drag&dropping with the left mouse button.</td></tr>
|
||||
<tr><td><span class="menu">Change Directory</span></td><td> </td><td>Changes to the folder of the dragged file.</td></tr>
|
||||
<tr><td><span class="menu">Create Link Here</span></td><td> </td><td>Creates a link to the dragged file in the current working directory of the Terminal.</td></tr>
|
||||
<tr><td><span class="menu">Move Here</span></td><td> </td><td>Moves the dragged file into the current working directory of the Terminal.</td></tr>
|
||||
<tr><td><span class="menu">Copy Here</span></td><td> </td><td>Copies the dragged file into the current working directory of the Terminal.</td></tr>
|
||||
<tr><td><span class="menu">Insert path</span></td><td> </td><td>Inserts the location of the file, same as drag&dropping with the left mouse button.</td></tr>
|
||||
<tr><td><span class="menu">Change directory</span></td><td> </td><td>Changes to the folder of the dragged file.</td></tr>
|
||||
<tr><td><span class="menu">Create link here</span></td><td> </td><td>Creates a link to the dragged file in the current working directory of the Terminal.</td></tr>
|
||||
<tr><td><span class="menu">Move here</span></td><td> </td><td>Moves the dragged file into the current working directory of the Terminal.</td></tr>
|
||||
<tr><td><span class="menu">Copy here</span></td><td> </td><td>Copies the dragged file into the current working directory of the Terminal.</td></tr>
|
||||
</table></li>
|
||||
<li><p>You can open any file with its preferred application with the command <span class="cli">open <i>[filename]</i></span>. This also works with the representation of the current ("<span class="cli">.</span>") and parent ("<span class="cli">..</span>") folder which then open in a Tracker window. So, to open the current working directory, you type:</p>
|
||||
<pre class="terminal">open .</pre>
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -58,16 +58,16 @@
|
||||
<img src="../images/desktop-applets-images/launchbox.png" alt="launchbox.png" />
|
||||
<p>All options are reached from the context menu:</p>
|
||||
<table summary="layout" border="0" cellpadding="2" cellspacing="0">
|
||||
<tr><td><span class="menu">Add Button Here</span></td><td style="width:10px;"> </td><td>Adds an empty button.</td></tr>
|
||||
<tr><td><span class="menu">Clear Button</span></td><td> </td><td>Empties a button.</td></tr>
|
||||
<tr><td><span class="menu">Remove Button</span></td><td> </td><td>Removes a button.</td></tr>
|
||||
<tr><td><span class="menu">Add button here</span></td><td style="width:10px;"> </td><td>Adds an empty button.</td></tr>
|
||||
<tr><td><span class="menu">Clear button</span></td><td> </td><td>Empties a button.</td></tr>
|
||||
<tr><td><span class="menu">Remove button</span></td><td> </td><td>Removes a button.</td></tr>
|
||||
<tr><td class="onelinetop"><span class="menu">Settings</span><br />
|
||||
<span class="menu">- Horizontal Layout</span><br />
|
||||
<span class="menu">- Horizontal layout</span><br />
|
||||
<span class="menu">- Icon size</span><br />
|
||||
<span class="menu">- Ignore Double-click</span><br />
|
||||
<span class="menu">- Show Window Border</span><br />
|
||||
<span class="menu">- Auto Raise</span><br />
|
||||
<span class="menu">- Show On All Workspaces</span></td><td> </td><td class="onelinetop"><br />
|
||||
<span class="menu">- Ignore double-click</span><br />
|
||||
<span class="menu">- Show window border</span><br />
|
||||
<span class="menu">- Auto raise</span><br />
|
||||
<span class="menu">- Show on all workspaces</span></td><td> </td><td class="onelinetop"><br />
|
||||
Aligns the buttons horizontally.<br />
|
||||
Sets the icon size between 16 and 64 pixel.<br />
|
||||
Launches the object only once, even when you (accidentally) double-click.<br />
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -58,9 +58,9 @@
|
||||
</table>
|
||||
<p><br /></p>
|
||||
<img src="../images/workspaces-images/workspaces.png" alt="workspaces.png" />
|
||||
<p>You find the Workspaces applet with the other <span class="menu">Desktop Applets</span> in the Deskbar. It shows a miniature version of all workspaces. There are several options available from the context menu of the applet's window, which are all pretty self-explaining.<br />
|
||||
<span class="menu">Change Workspace Count...</span> will open the <a href="../preferences/screen.html">Screen</a> preferences where you set the number of workspaces and their arrangement (how many rows and columns).</p>
|
||||
<p>Since the applet is a <a href="../gui.html#replicants">Replicant</a>, you can resize the window as desired and then drag&drop it by its handle onto the desktop (make sure <span class="menu">Show Replicants</span> is activated in the Deskbar menu). Hold <span class="key">SHIFT</span> while resizing to keep your screen's aspect ratio.</p>
|
||||
<p>You find the Workspaces applet with the other <span class="menu">Desktop applets</span> in the Deskbar. It shows a miniature version of all workspaces. There are several options available from the context menu of the applet's window, which are all pretty self-explaining.<br />
|
||||
<span class="menu">Change workspace count...</span> will open the <a href="../preferences/screen.html">Screen</a> preferences where you set the number of workspaces and their arrangement (how many rows and columns).</p>
|
||||
<p>Since the applet is a <a href="../gui.html#replicants">Replicant</a>, you can resize the window as desired and then drag&drop it by its handle onto the desktop (make sure <span class="menu">Show replicants</span> is activated in the Deskbar menu). Hold <span class="key">SHIFT</span> while resizing to keep your screen's aspect ratio.</p>
|
||||
|
||||
<h2>
|
||||
<a href="#"><img src="../../images/up.png" style="border:none;float:right" alt="index" /></a>
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -4,7 +4,7 @@
|
||||
<head>
|
||||
<!--
|
||||
*
|
||||
* Copyright 2008, Haiku. All rights reserved.
|
||||
* Copyright 2008-2011, Haiku. All rights reserved.
|
||||
* Distributed under the terms of the MIT License.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* Authors:
|
||||
@@ -68,7 +68,15 @@
|
||||
<li><p>Il bottone "zoom" (o <span class="key">CTRL</span> <span class="key">ALT</span> <span class="key">Z</span>). Nella maggior parte delle applicazioni, espanderà la finestra alla dimensione massima. Ma questo, tuttavia, non è obbligatorio. Le finestre del Tracker, per esempio, verranno ridimensionate per adattarsi nel miglior modo possibile al contenuto.</p></li>
|
||||
<li><p>L'angolo di ridimensionamento. Il trascinamento di una finestra in qualsiasi altro luogo sul confine sposterà la finestra.</p></li>
|
||||
</ol>
|
||||
<div class="box-info">Tenendo premuti i tasti <span class="key">CTRL</span> <span class="key">ALT</span>, è possibile cliccare su qualsiasi punto della finestra e muoverla con il pulsante sinistro del mouse; il pulsante destro del mouse, invece, riporta la finestra alla posizione iniziale.</div>
|
||||
|
||||
<h2>
|
||||
<a href="#"><img src="../images/up.png" style="border:none;float:right" alt="index" /></a>
|
||||
<a id="move-resize" name="move-resize">A quick way to move or resize windows</a></h2>
|
||||
<p>Moving and resizing windows is a large part of interacting with several concurrently running applications. Instead of aiming at the small yellow title tab or the even tinier window border, there's a more convenient way to move a window. Also, additionally to its small size, the resize corner has another limitation: It only allows resizing at and in the direction of the lower right corner.</p>
|
||||
<p>To address these issues, Haiku provides a neat solution using the window management key combo <span class="key">CTRL</span> <span class="key">ALT</span> and the mouse. See also chapter <a href="keyboard-shortcuts.html#general">Shortcuts and key combinations</a> for more shortcuts concerning window management.</p>
|
||||
<img src="images/gui-images/resizing.png" alt="resizing.png" />
|
||||
<p>Holding down <span class="key">CTRL</span> <span class="key">ALT</span> will highlight the window borders nearest to the mouse pointer. Move the mouse in the direction of another border to change the target. Click and dragging with the <i>right mouse button</i> will resize the window along the highlighted border(s).</p>
|
||||
<p>Hold down <span class="key">CTRL</span> <span class="key">ALT</span> and click and drag with the <i>left mouse button</i> anywhere in a window to move it around. A quick click with the <i>right mouse button</i> sends it to the back.</p>
|
||||
|
||||
<h2>
|
||||
<a href="#"><img src="../images/up.png" style="border:none;float:right" alt="index" /></a>
|
||||
@@ -107,10 +115,12 @@ Tutti i favoriti sono conservati nella cartella <span class="path">/boot/home/co
|
||||
<h2>
|
||||
<a href="#"><img src="../images/up.png" style="border:none;float:right" alt="index" /></a>
|
||||
<a id="replicants" name="replicants">I replicanti</a></h2>
|
||||
<p>Replicants are small self-contained parts of applications that can be integrated into other programs. Provided Deskbar's option to <span class="menu">Show Replicants</span> is activated, you'll recognize a replicantable part of an application by its small handle, normally in the bottom right corner:</p>
|
||||
<p>I replicanti sono piccole parti di applicazioni che possono essere integrate in altri programmi.
|
||||
A patto che l'opzione della Deskbar <span class="menu">Visualizza i Replicanti</span> sia stata attivata, si potrà riconoscere una parte "replicabile" di un'applicazione dalla sua piccola maniglia, normalmente nell'angolo in basso a destra:</p>
|
||||
<img src="../images/gui-images/replicant.png" alt="replicant.png" />
|
||||
<p>The most prominent place that accepts Replicants is the Desktop: You simply drag&drop the little handle onto it. From now on it's part of the Desktop and the Replicant's originating app doesn't have to be started for it to work.<br />
|
||||
A right-click on a Replicant handle offers a context menu to show the originating app's <span class="menu">About</span> window and to <span class="menu">Remove Replicant</span>.</p>
|
||||
<p>Il luogo più significante che accetta i replicanti è il Desktop: basta semplicemente trascinare la piccola maniglia su di esso.
|
||||
Da ora in poi è parte del Desktop e l'applicazione principale del replicante non deve essere avviata per farlo funzionare.<br />
|
||||
Un tasto destro sull'uncino del replicante permette di visualizzare la finestra <span class="menu">About</span> dell'applicazione principale e rimuovere il replicante.</p>
|
||||
<div class="box-info">Should you experience difficulties with a Replicant on the Desktop and just can't get rid of it, delete <span class="path">~/config/settings/Tracker/tracker_shelf</span>. Unfortunately, this will remove <i>all</i> Replicants from the Desktop.</div>
|
||||
<p>Esempi di applicazioni replicabili sono i grafici dell'<a href="applications/activitymonitor.html">ActivityMonitor</a>, l'<a href="workspaces.html">applet Workspace</a> o <a href="applications/deskcalc.html">DeskCalc</a>.</p>
|
||||
</div>
|
||||
|
||||
|
After Width: | Height: | Size: 9.0 KiB |
|
After Width: | Height: | Size: 7.5 KiB |
|
After Width: | Height: | Size: 6.1 KiB |
|
After Width: | Height: | Size: 5.3 KiB |
|
After Width: | Height: | Size: 8.9 KiB |
@@ -4,7 +4,7 @@
|
||||
<head>
|
||||
<!--
|
||||
*
|
||||
* Copyright 2008-2010, Haiku. All rights reserved.
|
||||
* Copyright 2008-2011, Haiku. All rights reserved.
|
||||
* Distributed under the terms of the MIT License.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* Authors:
|
||||
@@ -66,17 +66,20 @@
|
||||
<table summary="shortcuts" border="0" cellspacing="0" cellpadding="4">
|
||||
<tr><td><span class="key">ALT</span> <span class="key">Fx</span></td><td style="width:15px;"></td><td>Passa allo <a href="workspaces.html">Spazio di lavoro</a> X (<span class="key">Fx</span> è il tasto di funzione corrispondente a tale area di lavoro), è possibile trascinare la finestra attiva usando il tasto <span class="key">SHIFT</span>.</td></tr>
|
||||
<tr><td class="onelinetop"><span class="key">CTRL</span> <span class="key">ALT</span> <span class="key">←</span> / <span class="key">→</span> / <span class="key">↑</span> / <span class="key">↓</span></td><td></td><td>Permette di navigare spazialmente tra le righe/colonne delle aree di lavoro disponibili, è sufficiente aggiungere <span class="key">SHIFT</span> per trascinare la finestra attiva verso il nuovo workspace.</td></tr>
|
||||
<tr><td><span class="key">CTRL</span> <span class="key">ALT</span> + left mouse</td><td></td><td>Click and drag with left mouse button to move a window (see chapter <a href="gui.html#move-resize">GUI</a>).</td></tr>
|
||||
<tr><td><span class="key">CTRL</span> <span class="key">ALT</span> + right mouse</td><td></td><td>Click and drag with right mouse button to resize a window (see chapter <a href="gui.html#move-resize">GUI</a>).</td></tr>
|
||||
<tr><td><span class="key">CTRL</span> <span class="key">ALT</span> <span class="key">Z</span></td><td></td><td>Esegue lo zoom di una finestra ad un'altra dimensione (usa la dimensione massima per la maggior parte delle applicazioni).</td></tr>
|
||||
<tr><td><span class="key">CTRL</span> <span class="key">ALT</span> <span class="key">M</span></td><td></td><td>Minimizza la finestra attiva.</td></tr>
|
||||
<tr><td><span class="key">CTRL</span> <span class="key">ALT</span> <span class="key">H</span></td><td></td><td>Nasconde (minimizza) tutte le finestre dell'applicazione attiva.</td></tr>
|
||||
<tr><td><span class="key">CTRL</span> <span class="key">ALT</span> <span class="key">F</span></td><td></td><td>Pulls the active window to the front (only applicable with the mouse setting <a href="preferences/mouse.html">Focus Follows Mouse</a>).</td></tr>
|
||||
<tr><td><span class="key">CTRL</span> <span class="key">ALT</span> <span class="key">B</span></td><td></td><td>Invia la finestra attiva sotto tutte le altre.</td></tr>
|
||||
<tr><td><span class="key">CTRL</span> <span class="key">TAB</span></td><td></td><td>Quando viene premuta la combinazione appare il <a href="twitcher.html">Twitcher</a>.</td></tr>
|
||||
<tr><td><span class="key">CTRL</span> <span class="key">ALT</span> <span class="key">DEL</span></td><td></td><td>Apre il <a href="teammonitor.html">Team Monitor</a>.</td></tr>
|
||||
<tr><td><span class="key">ALT</span> <span class="key">ESC</span></td><td></td><td>Entra nella barra dei menu (si chiude con <span class="key">ESC</span>).</td></tr>
|
||||
<tr><td><span class="key">ALT</span> <span class="key">C</span></td><td></td><td>Copia la selezione negli appunti.</td></tr>
|
||||
<tr><td><span class="key">ALT</span> <span class="key">X</span></td><td></td><td>Taglia la selezione negli appunti.</td></tr>
|
||||
<tr><td><span class="key">ALT</span> <span class="key">V</span></td><td></td><td>Incolla il contenuto degli appunti.</td></tr>
|
||||
<tr><td><span class="key">ALT</span> <span class="key">W</span></td><td></td><td>Chiude la finestra attiva.</td></tr><tr><td><span class="key">CTRL</span> <span class="key">ALT</span> <span class="key">Z</span></td><td></td><td>Esegue lo zoom di una finestra ad un'altra dimensione (usa la dimensione massima per la maggior parte delle applicazioni).</td></tr>
|
||||
<tr><td><span class="key">CTRL</span> <span class="key">ALT</span> <span class="key">M</span></td><td></td><td>Minimizza la finestra attiva.</td></tr>
|
||||
<tr><td><span class="key">CTRL</span> <span class="key">ALT</span> <span class="key">H</span></td><td></td><td>Nasconde (minimizza) tutte le finestre dell'applicazione attiva.</td></tr>
|
||||
<tr><td><span class="key">CTRL</span> <span class="key">ALT</span> <span class="key">F</span></td><td></td><td>Pulls the active window to the front (only applicable with the mouse setting <a href="preferences/mouse.html">Focus Follows Mouse</a>).</td></tr>
|
||||
<tr><td><span class="key">CTRL</span> <span class="key">ALT</span> <span class="key">B</span></td><td></td><td>Invia la finestra attiva sotto tutte le altre.</td></tr>
|
||||
<tr><td><span class="key">ALT</span> <span class="key">W</span></td><td></td><td>Chiude la finestra attiva.</td></tr>
|
||||
<tr><td><span class="key">ALT</span> <span class="key">Q</span></td><td></td><td>Esce da un'applicazione.</td></tr>
|
||||
<tr><td><span class="key">PRINT</span></td><td style="width:15px;"></td><td>Cattura subito un'immagine e lancia il pannello <a href="applications/screenshot.html">Screenshot</a>.</td></tr>
|
||||
<tr><td class="onelinetop"><span class="key">SHIFT</span> <span class="key">PRINT</span></td><td></td><td>Cattura un'immagine silenziosamente (senza aprire il pannello), pur rispettando le ultime impostazioni utilizzate.</td></tr>
|
||||
@@ -125,8 +128,9 @@
|
||||
<tr><td><span class="key">SHIFT</span></td><td style="width:15px;"></td><td>Questo selezionerà tutto tra il primo elemento selezionato e quello su cui si clicca.</td></tr>
|
||||
<tr><td><span class="key">ALT</span></td><td></td><td>Aggiunge o rimuove l'oggetto su cui si sta cliccando alla/dalla selezione.</td></tr>
|
||||
</table>
|
||||
<p>Iniziando a digitare in una finestra del Tracker, verranno visualizzati i file che si adattano meglio alla ricerca. Se non ci sono file che iniziano con le lettere digitate, vengono selezionati i file che contengono la stringa di ricerca in qualunque parte nel loro nome o in altri attributi visualizzati. Questa ricerca <i>non</i> è case-sensitive.<br />
|
||||
Le lettere digitate appaiono in basso a sinistra, dove normalmente è elencato il numero di elementi. Dopo un secondo viene ripristinato e si potrà avviare una nuova ricerca.</p>
|
||||
<p>In a Tracker window, if you just start typing, Tracker scrolls to and selects the file that best fits your incremental search. If there's no file starting with your typed letters, files that contain the search string anywhere in their name or other displayed attributes are selected. This search is <i>not</i> case-sensitive.<br />
|
||||
The letters you type appear at the bottom-left, where normally the number of items is listed. After a second it reverts back and you could start a new incremental search.<br />
|
||||
Instead of jumping to the first occurrence of your search string, Tracker can be configured to filter out all non-matching files. See the topic on <a href="tracker.html#tracker-preferences">type-ahead filtering</a>.</p>
|
||||
|
||||
</div>
|
||||
</div>
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -13,6 +13,7 @@
|
||||
* Giuseppe Gargaro
|
||||
* MichaelPeppers
|
||||
* Andrea
|
||||
* Humdinger
|
||||
*
|
||||
-->
|
||||
<meta http-equiv="content-type" content="text/html; charset=utf-8" />
|
||||
@@ -75,10 +76,10 @@
|
||||
<h3>
|
||||
<a href="#"><img src="../../images/up.png" style="border:none;float:right" alt="index" /></a>
|
||||
Glyph hinting</h3>
|
||||
<p>An activated <span class="menu">Glyph hinting</span> aligns all letters in such a way that their vertical and horizontal edges rest exactly between two pixels. The result is a perfect contrast, especially when dealing with black on white. Text appears crisper. There's also a setting for <span class="menu">Monospaced Fonts Only</span> that's especially helpful with low resolution devices like netbooks. Small fonts can look pretty bad when hinting is turned on, but with this setting you still have the advantage of hinting for text editors and Terminal.</p>
|
||||
<p>An activated <span class="menu">Glyph hinting</span> aligns all letters in such a way that their vertical and horizontal edges rest exactly between two pixels. The result is a perfect contrast, especially when dealing with black on white. Text appears crisper. There's also a setting for <span class="menu">Monospaced fonts only</span> that's especially helpful with low resolution devices like netbooks. Small fonts can look pretty bad when hinting is turned on, but with this setting you still have the advantage of hinting for text editors and Terminal.</p>
|
||||
<p>Osservate le differenze che si hanno attivando o disattivando l'hinting in questi due screenshot:</p>
|
||||
<table summary="layout" border="0" cellspacing="0" cellpadding="2">
|
||||
<tr><td style="text-align:center; font-style:italic"><img src="../../images/prefs-images/appearance-glyph-off.png" alt="appearance-glyph-off.png" /><br />Hinting: disattivato</td><td style="width:15px;"></td><td style="text-align:center; font-style:italic"><img src="../../images/prefs-images/appearance-glyph-on.png" alt="appearance-glyph-on.png" /><br />Hinting: attivato</td></tr>
|
||||
<tr><td style="text-align:center; font-style:italic"><img src="../images/prefs-images/appearance-glyph-off.png" alt="appearance-glyph-off.png" /><br />Hinting: disattivato</td><td style="width:15px;"></td><td style="text-align:center; font-style:italic"><img src="../images/prefs-images/appearance-glyph-on.png" alt="appearance-glyph-on.png" /><br />Hinting: attivato</td></tr>
|
||||
</table>
|
||||
<p>It should be pointed out that all the <span class="app">Magnify</span> windows on this page are of course rendered themselves with the different options as well. So, you get a real world impression of the settings by comparing, for example, the bold yellow tab title or the text "33 x 15 @ 8 pixels/pixel".</p>
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -90,13 +91,13 @@ Antialiasing type</h3>
|
||||
<span class="menu">LCD subpixel</span> does an even better job, especially with (high resolution) LCD monitors. Instead of the intensity of a pixel, it changes its color which moves an edge by a fraction of a pixel, because LCD displays produce every pixel with a red, green and blue component.</p>
|
||||
<p>Again, the two different methods with magnified screenshots:</p>
|
||||
<table summary="layout" border="0" cellspacing="0" cellpadding="2">
|
||||
<tr><td style="text-align:center; font-style:italic"><img src="../../images/prefs-images/appearance-glyph-off.png" alt="appearance-glyph-off.png" /><br />Grayscale, Hinting: off</td><td style="width:15px;"></td><td style="text-align:center; font-style:italic"><img src="../../images/prefs-images/appearance-subpixel.png" alt="appearance-subpixel.png" /><br />LCD subpixel, Hinting: off</td></tr>
|
||||
<tr><td style="text-align:center; font-style:italic"><img src="../images/prefs-images/appearance-glyph-off.png" alt="appearance-glyph-off.png" /><br />Grayscale, Hinting: off</td><td style="width:15px;"></td><td style="text-align:center; font-style:italic"><img src="../images/prefs-images/appearance-subpixel.png" alt="appearance-subpixel.png" /><br />LCD subpixel, Hinting: off</td></tr>
|
||||
</table>
|
||||
<p>Subpixel based antialiasing adds a slight colored shine to objects. Something not everyone tolerates. In Haiku you can mix the two antialiasing methods and find the right setting for you by using a slider.</p>
|
||||
<div class="box-info">The subpixel based antialiasing in combination with the glyph hinting is subject of a software patent and is therefore not available by default. Depending on where in the world you live, you may get an unlocked version. Sorry about that. Talk with your representative.</div>
|
||||
<p>If you do activate hinting plus LCD subpixel rendering by changing the source and recompiling, this is how it looks compared to hinting with Grayscale:</p>
|
||||
<table summary="layout" border="0" cellspacing="0" cellpadding="2">
|
||||
<tr><td style="text-align:center; font-style:italic"><img src="../../images/prefs-images/appearance-glyph-on.png" alt="appearance-glyph-on.png" /><br />Grayscale, Hinting: on</td><td style="width:15px;"></td><td style="text-align:center; font-style:italic"><img src="../../images/prefs-images/appearance-glyph-on-subpixel.png" alt="appearance-glyph-on-subpixel.png" /><br />LCD subpixel, Hinting: on</td></tr>
|
||||
<tr><td style="text-align:center; font-style:italic"><img src="../images/prefs-images/appearance-glyph-on.png" alt="appearance-glyph-on.png" /><br />Grayscale, Hinting: on</td><td style="width:15px;"></td><td style="text-align:center; font-style:italic"><img src="../images/prefs-images/appearance-glyph-on-subpixel.png" alt="appearance-glyph-on-subpixel.png" /><br />LCD subpixel, Hinting: on</td></tr>
|
||||
</table>
|
||||
<p><br /></p>
|
||||
<p>Nel fondo del pannello ci sono due pulsanti:</p>
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -62,25 +62,25 @@
|
||||
<p>Depending on its capabilities, each Translator offers different settings. At least you'll get an <span class="button">Info...</span> button that opens a window with the credits and the installation path.<br />
|
||||
The following table gives an overview of the default Translators and their most useful options.</p>
|
||||
<table summary="translators" border="0" cellpadding="2" cellspacing="0">
|
||||
<tr><td><span class="menu">BMP Images</span></td><td>24bit, uncompressed, no transparency</td></tr>
|
||||
<tr><td><span class="menu">EXR Images</span></td><td><acronym title="Industrial Light & Magic">ILM</acronym>'s high dynamic-range (HDR) format</td></tr>
|
||||
<tr><td><span class="menu">GIF Images</span></td><td>8bit, lossless compression, transparency<br />
|
||||
<tr><td><span class="menu">BMP images</span></td><td>24bit, uncompressed, no transparency</td></tr>
|
||||
<tr><td><span class="menu">EXR images</span></td><td><acronym title="Industrial Light & Magic">ILM</acronym>'s high dynamic-range (HDR) format</td></tr>
|
||||
<tr><td><span class="menu">GIF images</span></td><td>8bit, lossless compression, transparency<br />
|
||||
You can reduce the filesize by limiting the number of used colors and the palette.<br />
|
||||
You can write images with transparency, either by automatically using the alpha channel or by setting the RGB value that will be transparent by hand.</td></tr>
|
||||
<tr><td><span class="menu">JPEG2000 Images</span></td><td>24bit, compressed, no transparency<br />
|
||||
<tr><td><span class="menu">JPEG2000 images</span></td><td>24bit, compressed, no transparency<br />
|
||||
Here, you normally only care about the output quality.</td></tr>
|
||||
<tr><td><span class="menu">JPEG Images</span></td><td>24bit, compressed, no transparency<br />
|
||||
<tr><td><span class="menu">JPEG images</span></td><td>24bit, compressed, no transparency<br />
|
||||
Besides the output quality you can also set a smoothing that will lessen compression artefacts but can blur the picture a little.</td></tr>
|
||||
<tr><td><span class="menu">PCX Images</span></td><td>24bit, uncompressed, no transparency, PC Paintbrush Exchange format</td></tr>
|
||||
<tr><td><span class="menu">PNG Images</span></td><td>32bit, lossless compression, transparency</td></tr>
|
||||
<tr><td><span class="menu">PPM Images</span></td><td>24bit, uncompressed, no transparency, Portable PixMap format</td></tr>
|
||||
<tr><td><span class="menu">RAW Images</span></td><td>up to 48bit, uncompressed, no transparency</td></tr>
|
||||
<tr><td><span class="menu">RTF Text Files</span></td><td>Formatted text</td></tr>
|
||||
<tr><td><span class="menu">SGI Images</span></td><td>24bit, optional lossless compression, transparency</td></tr>
|
||||
<tr><td><span class="menu">StyledEdit Files</span></td><td>Formatted text</td></tr>
|
||||
<tr><td><span class="menu">TGA Images</span></td><td>32bit, optional lossless compression, transparency</td></tr>
|
||||
<tr><td><span class="menu">TIFF Images</span></td><td>24bit, optional lossless compression, layers, transparency</td></tr>
|
||||
<tr><td class="onelinetop"><span class="menu">WonderBrush Images</span></td><td>32bit, layers, transparency, vector/pixel data</td></tr>
|
||||
<tr><td><span class="menu">PCX images</span></td><td>24bit, uncompressed, no transparency, PC Paintbrush Exchange format</td></tr>
|
||||
<tr><td><span class="menu">PNG images</span></td><td>32bit, lossless compression, transparency</td></tr>
|
||||
<tr><td><span class="menu">PPM images</span></td><td>24bit, uncompressed, no transparency, Portable PixMap format</td></tr>
|
||||
<tr><td><span class="menu">RAW images</span></td><td>up to 48bit, uncompressed, no transparency</td></tr>
|
||||
<tr><td><span class="menu">RTF text files</span></td><td>Formatted text</td></tr>
|
||||
<tr><td><span class="menu">SGI images</span></td><td>24bit, optional lossless compression, transparency</td></tr>
|
||||
<tr><td><span class="menu">StyledEdit files</span></td><td>Formatted text</td></tr>
|
||||
<tr><td><span class="menu">TGA images</span></td><td>32bit, optional lossless compression, transparency</td></tr>
|
||||
<tr><td><span class="menu">TIFF images</span></td><td>24bit, optional lossless compression, layers, transparency</td></tr>
|
||||
<tr><td class="onelinetop"><span class="menu">WonderBrush images</span></td><td>32bit, layers, transparency, vector/pixel data</td></tr>
|
||||
</table>
|
||||
<p><br /></p>
|
||||
<div class="box-info">Screenshots, charts, black&white drawings and other images with few used colors, as well as small pictures are best saved as GIF (up to 256 colors) or PNG (millions of colors). JPEG, for example, introduces compression artefacts without gain in smaller filesize.</div>
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -77,8 +77,8 @@ The configuration is done in the E-Mail preference panel.</p>
|
||||
<p>Let's go through the process of setting up an e-mail account.<br />
|
||||
You start by clicking the <span class="button">Add</span> button to create a new, unnamed account. This opens a panel where you fill in your account info:</p>
|
||||
<img src="../images/prefs-images/e-mail-new-account.png" alt="e-mail-new-account.png" />
|
||||
<p>First, declare the <i>Account Type</i> which is either <span class="menu">Receive Mail Only</span>, <span class="menu">Send Mail Only</span>, or the most usual type, <span class="menu">Send and Receive Mail</span>. Then you set how you get your mail, via <span class="menu">POP3</span> or <span class="menu">IMAP</span>.</p>
|
||||
<p>Now you enter your <i>E-mail Address</i>, <i>Login Name</i> and <i>Password</i>, give an <i>Account Name</i> under which it will be known under Haiku and your <i>Real Name</i>.</p>
|
||||
<p>First, declare the <i>Account type</i> which is either <span class="menu">Receive mail only</span>, <span class="menu">Send mail only</span>, or the most usual type, <span class="menu">Send and receive mail</span>. Then you set how you get your mail, via <span class="menu">POP3</span> or <span class="menu">IMAP</span>.</p>
|
||||
<p>Now you enter your <i>E-mail address</i>, <i>Login name</i> and <i>Password</i>, give an <i>Account name</i> under which it will be known under Haiku and your <i>Real name</i>.</p>
|
||||
<p>If your account is from a major e-mail provider, Haiku already knows all technical details like server IP addresses and the following information is already filled in automatically. If that is not the case, just follow this guide and fill in the details to your e-mail account accordingly.</p>
|
||||
|
||||
<h2>
|
||||
@@ -87,11 +87,11 @@ You start by clicking the <span class="button">Add</span> button to create a new
|
||||
<p>Click on <span class="menu">Incoming</span> under your account's name to set up how e-mails are received.</p>
|
||||
<img src="../images/prefs-images/e-mail-in.png" alt="e-mail-in.png" />
|
||||
<p>From the pop-up menu you choose the protocol used by your provider. <span class="menu">IMAP</span> and <span class="menu">POP3</span> are supported.</p>
|
||||
<p>Next is the <span class="menu">Mail Server</span> address for incoming mails. If your provider needs you to log into a specific port, you add that to the address, separated by a colon. For example, <tt>pop.your-provider.org:1400</tt>.</p>
|
||||
<p>Then you enter your login information, <i>Username</i> and <i>Password</i>, and if necessary change the <i>Login Type</i> from the default <span class="menu">Plain Text</span> to <span class="menu">APOP</span> for authentication.</p>
|
||||
<p>Next is the <span class="menu">Mail server</span> address for incoming mails. If your provider needs you to log into a specific port, you add that to the address, separated by a colon. For example, <tt>pop.your-provider.org:1400</tt>.</p>
|
||||
<p>Then you enter your login information, <i>Username</i> and <i>Password</i>, and if necessary change the <i>Login type</i> from the default <span class="menu">Plain text</span> to <span class="menu">APOP</span> for authentication.</p>
|
||||
<p>If you use <i>POP3</i> and retrieve mails of this account from different computers, you may want to activate the option to <span class="menu">Leave mail on server</span> and only <span class="menu">Remove mail from server when deleted</span> locally.</p>
|
||||
<p>If you use <i>IMAP</i> instead, you have the option to <span class="menu">Remove mail from server when deleted</span> locally. You can specify a <span class="menu">Top Mailbox Folder</span> to only synchronize with a specific folder and its subfolders.</p>
|
||||
<p>The <span class="menu">New Mail Notification</span> offers different methods to announce the arrival of new mail. Try different settings to see what works best for you.</p>
|
||||
<p>If you use <i>IMAP</i> instead, you have the option to <span class="menu">Remove mail from server when deleted</span> locally. You can specify a <span class="menu">Top mailbox folder</span> to only synchronize with a specific folder and its subfolders.</p>
|
||||
<p>The <span class="menu">New mail notification</span> offers different methods to announce the arrival of new mail. Try different settings to see what works best for you.</p>
|
||||
<p>You can change the <i>Location</i> of your inbox (default: <span class="path">/boot/home/mail/in/</span>), which is useful if you'd like to separate the mails from different accounts into their own folders. However, queries let you sort things out just as well.</p>
|
||||
<p>Last on this page, you can opt to only <span class="menu">Partially download messages</span> that are larger than a certain size. This will only get the header and you can decide if you want to download the rest of the message plus possible attachments after seeing the subject and who sent it. Useful if you have a slow connection.</p>
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -107,8 +107,8 @@ You start by clicking the <span class="button">Add</span> button to create a new
|
||||
<h2>
|
||||
<a href="#"><img src="../../images/up.png" style="border:none;float:right" alt="index" /></a>
|
||||
<a id="filters" name="filters">Setting up e-mail filters</a></h2>
|
||||
<p>If you want to filter your incoming email, you click on <span class="menu">E-Mail Filters</span> under your account's name to set up automatic sorting. You can add any number of filters that are applied one after the other. You can rearrange them by drag&dropping them to their new position.<br />
|
||||
Besides the <span class="menu">R5 Daemon Filter</span> that's used for backward compatibility, there are two other <span class="menu">Incoming Mail Filters</span> you can add.</p>
|
||||
<p>If you want to filter your incoming email, you click on <span class="menu">E-Mail filters</span> under your account's name to set up automatic sorting. You can add any number of filters that are applied one after the other. You can rearrange them by drag&dropping them to their new position.<br />
|
||||
Besides the <span class="menu">R5 daemon filter</span> that's used for backward compatibility, there are two other <span class="menu">Incoming mail filters</span> you can add.</p>
|
||||
|
||||
<h3>
|
||||
<a href="#"><img src="../../images/up.png" style="border:none;float:right" alt="index" /></a>
|
||||
@@ -117,7 +117,7 @@ Filtro antispam</h3>
|
||||
<p>The spam filter uses statistical methods to classify a mail as unwanted spam. It assigns a value between 0 and 1 to it and you can decide what are the limits for a genuine mail and what will be considered spam.<br />
|
||||
You can have that spam rating added to the start of the subject.<br />
|
||||
Also, the spam filter can learn from all incoming e-mail. Of course, you'll have to teach it by sorting out the false positives, mails that were mistakenly marked as spam. You'll find more on that when we discuss the application <span class="app">Mail</span>.</p>
|
||||
<p>Together with the following <span class="menu">Match Header</span> filter, you're able to automatically sort out detected spam mails.</p>
|
||||
<p>Together with the following <span class="menu">Match header</span> filter, you're able to automatically sort out detected spam mails.</p>
|
||||
|
||||
<h3>
|
||||
<a href="#"><img src="../../images/up.png" style="border:none;float:right" alt="index" /></a>
|
||||
@@ -132,7 +132,7 @@ With the first text field you specify which header to check against. These are a
|
||||
<td>the e-mail address of the sender</td></tr>
|
||||
<tr><td><span class="menu">To</span></td><td> </td>
|
||||
<td>your e-mail address (different for each e-mail account)</td></tr>
|
||||
<tr><td><span class="menu">Reply To</span></td><td> </td>
|
||||
<tr><td><span class="menu">Reply to</span></td><td> </td>
|
||||
<td>the e-mail address replies are sent to</td></tr>
|
||||
<tr><td><span class="menu">When</span></td><td> </td>
|
||||
<td>the date and time the mail was received</td></tr>
|
||||
@@ -148,9 +148,9 @@ With the first text field you specify which header to check against. These are a
|
||||
<td>is set by the sender's e-mail program (e.g. "urgent")</td></tr>
|
||||
<tr><td><span class="menu">Thread</span></td><td> </td>
|
||||
<td>essentially the same as "Subject", but without things like Re: or Fwd:</td></tr>
|
||||
<tr><td><span class="menu">Classification Group</span></td><td> </td>
|
||||
<tr><td><span class="menu">Classification group</span></td><td> </td>
|
||||
<td>depending on what the spam filter classified it as, this will either be empty (if uncertain) or contain the word "Genuine" or "Spam"</td></tr>
|
||||
<tr><td><span class="menu">Spam/Genuine Estimate</span></td><td> </td>
|
||||
<tr><td><span class="menu">Spam/Genuine estimate</span></td><td> </td>
|
||||
<td>this is a numerical estimate that the spam filter assigned to the e-mail. They are shown in scientific notation, where 1.065e-12 translates to 1.065 divided by 10 to the 12th power, which in this case translates to 0.000000000001065.</td></tr>
|
||||
</table>
|
||||
<p>The second text field holds your search pattern. It accepts <a href="http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Regular_expression" class="external free" title="Wikipedia: Regular expression" rel="nofollow">regular expressions</a> which gives it great flexibility, while unfortunately complicating things a bit. Read up on it a bit, it's well worth it and simple search patterns aren't <i>that</i> complicated at all.</p>
|
||||
@@ -167,13 +167,13 @@ Outgoing Mail Filters</h3>
|
||||
<a id="settings" name="settings">Setting up the Mail Service</a></h2>
|
||||
<p>Now that your incoming and outgoing mail servers (and maybe some filters, too), are configured, you have to tell the Mail Service that does all the actual checking and fetching how to do its job.</p>
|
||||
<img src="../images/prefs-images/e-mail-settings.png" alt="e-mail-settings.png" />
|
||||
<p>Under <i>Mail Checking</i> you configure the interval at which the account's mail server is probed for new mail.<br />
|
||||
If you're on a dial-up connection, you may want to do that <span class="menu">Only When Dial-Up is Connected</span> and also <span class="menu">Schedule Outgoing Mail When Dial-Up is Disconnected</span> to avoid dialing automatically in regularly only to check for mail.</p>
|
||||
<p>The Mail Service has a status window which you can set to show up <span class="menu">Never</span>, <span class="menu">While Sending</span>, <span class="menu">While Sending and Receiving</span> or <span class="menu">Always</span>.</p>
|
||||
<p>Make sure to <span class="menu">Start Mail Services on Startup</span> or there will be no mail_daemon running to do your bidding...</p>
|
||||
<p>Under <i>Mail checking</i> you configure the interval at which the account's mail server is probed for new mail.<br />
|
||||
If you're on a dial-up connection, you may want to do that <span class="menu">Only when dial-up is connected</span> and also <span class="menu">Schedule outgoing mail when dial-up is disconnected</span> to avoid dialing automatically in regularly only to check for mail.</p>
|
||||
<p>The Mail Service has a status window which you can set to show up <span class="menu">Never</span>, <span class="menu">While sending</span>, <span class="menu">While sending and receiving</span> or <span class="menu">Always</span>.</p>
|
||||
<p>Make sure to <span class="menu">Start mail services on startup</span> or there will be no mail_daemon running to do your bidding...</p>
|
||||
<img src="../images/prefs-images/e-mail-mailbox.png" alt="e-mail-mailbox.png" />
|
||||
<p><span class="menu">Edit Mailbox Menu...</span> will open the folder <span class="path">/boot/home/config/Mail/Menu Links/</span>. All folders or queries (!) or their links put into this folder will appear in the context menu of the mailbox icon of the Mail Services in the Deskbar tray.</p>
|
||||
<p>From that menu, you can also <span class="menu">Create New Message...</span>, <span class="menu">Check For Mail Now</span> or <span class="menu">Edit Preferences...</span>.</p>
|
||||
<p><span class="menu">Edit mailbox menu...</span> will open the folder <span class="path">/boot/home/config/Mail/Menu Links/</span>. All folders or queries (!) or their links put into this folder will appear in the context menu of the mailbox icon of the Mail Services in the Deskbar tray.</p>
|
||||
<p>From that menu, you can also <span class="menu">Create new message...</span>, <span class="menu">Check for mail now</span> or <span class="menu">Edit preferences...</span>.</p>
|
||||
<p>The mailbox icon itself shows if there are unread messages (status "New") when there are envelopes inside.</p>
|
||||
|
||||
</div>
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -64,8 +64,8 @@ Thus, the Keymap preferences are not only for configuring your local keymap, but
|
||||
<p>Then there are the keys that are marked with a blue background. These keys are called <i>Dead Keys</i> that can change the key you press after that. If you click on such a blue key with your mouse, those changeable keys light up yellow. Click again and everything's back to normal. Examples are é, ñ, ó or ë.</p>
|
||||
<p>Below the keyboard representation are two more options:</p>
|
||||
<table summary="layout" border="0" cellpadding="2" cellspacing="0">
|
||||
<tr><td><span class="menu">Select Dead Keys</span></td><td> </td><td>for setting the above mentioned blue keys.</td></tr>
|
||||
<tr><td class="onelinetop"><span class="menu">Switch Shortcut Key...</span></td><td> </td><td>for using the shortcut key in Windows/Linux mode, i.e. <span class="key">CONTROL</span> (normally <span class="key">CTRL</span>) or Haiku mode, i.e. <span class="key">COMMAND</span> (normally <span class="key">ALT</span>).</td></tr>
|
||||
<tr><td><span class="menu">Select dead keys</span></td><td> </td><td>for setting the above mentioned blue keys.</td></tr>
|
||||
<tr><td class="onelinetop"><span class="menu">Switch shortcut key...</span></td><td> </td><td>for using the shortcut key in Windows/Linux mode, i.e. <span class="key">CONTROL</span> (normally <span class="key">CTRL</span>) or Haiku mode, i.e. <span class="key">COMMAND</span> (normally <span class="key">ALT</span>).</td></tr>
|
||||
</table>
|
||||
<p>The lists on the left offer the available pre-configured keymaps of the system, and below that, if available, user-defined maps. You can change a keymap via drag&drop in the keyboard representation: a left-click-drag copies a key, a right-click-drag exchanges the two keys.<br />
|
||||
When you're done you can save the result from the menu <span class="menu">File | Save...</span>. Your modified map will only appear in the user-defined list if it's stored in <span class="path">~/config/settings/Keymap/</span>. Otherwise you'll have to manually load it via <span class="menu">File | Open...</span>.</p>
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -76,7 +76,7 @@
|
||||
<a href="#"><img src="../../images/up.png" style="border:none;float:right" alt="index" /></a>
|
||||
<a id="timezone" name="timezone">Timezone</a></h2>
|
||||
<img src="../images/prefs-images/time-timezone.png" alt="time-timezone.png" />
|
||||
<p>Simply find and choose your location from the pop-up menu and the list of cities and press <span class="button">Set Time Zone</span> to set your zone.</p>
|
||||
<p>Simply find and choose your location from the pop-up menu and the list of cities and press <span class="button">Set time zone</span> to set your zone.</p>
|
||||
<p><span class="button">Revert</span> brings back the settings that were active when you started the Time preferences.</p>
|
||||
|
||||
</div>
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -51,6 +51,7 @@
|
||||
|
||||
<div id="content">
|
||||
<div>
|
||||
<div class="box-info">La traduzione di questa pagina non è stata completata. Per questo motivo le parti non tradotte sono visibili in inglese.</div>
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
<table class="index" id="index" summary="index">
|
||||
@@ -75,8 +76,8 @@
|
||||
<a id="mounting-volumes" name="mounting-volumes">Montaggio di volumi</a></h2>
|
||||
<p>Per accedere ad Hard Disk, CD, penne USB, ecc., bisogna come prima cosa montare il volume, ovvero mettere il sistema a conoscenza della sua presenza. Per fare ciò è necessario fare click col tasto destro sul Desktop o su un volume già montato (come il disco di boot) e scegliere il volume dal sottomenù <span class="menu">Mount</span>. È possibile trovare lo stesso menù <span class="menu">Mount</span> nella Deskbar.</p>
|
||||
<img src="images/tracker-images/mount-settings.png" alt="drill-down.png" />
|
||||
<p>Ci sono anche delle <span class="menu">Mount Settings</span> così da non dover montare tutto manualmente dopo ogni accensione.<br />
|
||||
Le impostazioni visibili sopra monteranno automaticamente ogni dispositivo che viene connesso o inserito, in più monterà all'avvio tutti i dischi che erano montati nella sessione precedente.</p>
|
||||
<p>There are also <span class="menu">Settings</span> so you don't have to mount everything manually after every bootup.<br />
|
||||
The above settings will automatically mount any storage device you connect/insert and also mount all disks on bootup that were mounted previously.</p>
|
||||
<div class="box-warning">Prima di disconnettere (ad esempio) un Hard Disk o una penna USB, bisogna assicurarsi di aver smontato correttamente il volume. Questa pratica garantisce che il trasferimento di tutti i dati sia concluso. Altrimenti potrebbe verificarsi una perdita dei dati o il danneggiamento del dispositivo.</div>
|
||||
|
||||
<h2>
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -50,7 +50,6 @@
|
||||
|
||||
<div id="content">
|
||||
<div>
|
||||
<div class="box-info">La traduzione di questa pagina non è stata completata. Per questo motivo le parti non tradotte sono visibili in inglese.</div>
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
<table class="index" id="index" summary="index">
|
||||
@@ -211,8 +210,8 @@ Maggiori informazioni sull'argomento sono reperibili nel capitolo sui <a href="f
|
||||
<a href="#"><img src="../images/up.png" style="border:none;float:right" alt="index" /></a>
|
||||
<a id="query-db" name="query-db">Effettuare query nel database</a></h2>
|
||||
<p>Dopo un paio d'ore di duro lavoro, si avrà un piccolo database nel quale è possibile ricercare tutti i film di Christina Ricci che hanno un bel 7+...</p>
|
||||
<p>You can assign a sensible attribute layout for query results of a specific filetype.<br />
|
||||
Open the folder containing your DVDdb files and arrange the attributes how you'd like to have query results presented. Copy this layout with <span class="menu">Attributes | Copy Layout</span>.</p>
|
||||
<p>È possibile determinare il layout dei risultati di uno specifico filetype.<br />
|
||||
Per fare questo aprire la cartella contenente i file DVDdb e sistemare a piacere i risultati come dovrebbero essere presentati. In fine copiare questo layout con <span class="menu">Attributes | Copy Layout</span>.</p>
|
||||
<p>Continuando, aprire la cartella <span class="path">/boot/home/config/settings/Tracker/DefaultQueryTemplates</span>, creandone una nuova e rinominandola <i>group/filetype</i>, rimpiazzando il carattere slash con degli underscore; nel nostro caso sarà "applications_DVDdb".</p>
|
||||
<p>Per finire si apra una nuova cartella e ci si incolli il layout con <span class="menu">Attributes | Paste Layout</span>. Ed ecco il risultato:</p>
|
||||
<img src="images/workshop-filetypes+attributes-images/query-dvddb.png" alt="query-dvddb.png" />
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -11,6 +11,7 @@
|
||||
* Humdinger <humdingerb@gmail.com>
|
||||
* Translators:
|
||||
* log-1
|
||||
* mt
|
||||
*
|
||||
-->
|
||||
<meta http-equiv="content-type" content="text/html; charset=utf-8" />
|
||||
@@ -23,7 +24,7 @@
|
||||
<body>
|
||||
|
||||
<div id="banner">
|
||||
<div><span>User guide</span></div>
|
||||
<div><span>ユーザーガイド</span></div>
|
||||
</div>
|
||||
|
||||
<div class="nav">
|
||||
@@ -42,15 +43,14 @@
|
||||
<li><a href="../en/applications.html"><img src="../images/flags/gb.png" alt="" />English</a></li>
|
||||
</ul>
|
||||
<span>
|
||||
« <a href="workshop-filetypes+attributes.html">Workshop</a>
|
||||
:: <a href="contents.html" class="uplink">Contents</a>
|
||||
« <a href="workshop-filetypes+attributes.html">ワークショップ</a>
|
||||
:: <a href="contents.html" class="uplink">目次</a>
|
||||
:: <a href="desktop-applets.html">Desktop Applets</a> »
|
||||
</span></div>
|
||||
</div>
|
||||
|
||||
<div id="content">
|
||||
<div>
|
||||
<div class="box-info">The translation of this page isn't yet complete. Until it is, unfinished parts use the English original.</div>
|
||||
|
||||
<h1>アプリケーション</h1>
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -112,9 +112,9 @@
|
||||
<tr><td style="width:24px;"><img src="../images/apps-images/mail-icon_16.png" alt="icon" width="16" height="16" /></td><td><a href="applications/mail.html">Mail</a></td><td> </td>
|
||||
<td valign="top"><span style="color:silver">電子メールクライアントです。[<i>まだ用意されていません。</i>]</span></td></tr>
|
||||
<tr><td style="width:24px;"><img src="../images/apps-images/mediaplayer-icon_16.png" alt="icon" width="16" height="16" /></td><td><a href="applications/mediaplayer.html">MediaPlayer</a></td><td> </td>
|
||||
<td valign="top">A player for all supported audio/video files.</td></tr>
|
||||
<td valign="top">サポートしている音声や動画ファイルを再生します。</td></tr>
|
||||
<tr><td style="width:24px;"><img src="../images/apps-images/midiplayer-icon_16.png" alt="icon" width="16" height="16" /></td><td><a href="applications/midiplayer.html">MidiPlayer</a></td><td> </td>
|
||||
<td valign="top"><span style="color:silver">MIDIファイルを再生します。[<i>まだ用意されていません。</i>]</span></td></tr>
|
||||
<td valign="top">MIDIファイルを再生します。</td></tr>
|
||||
<tr><td style="width:24px;"><img src="../images/apps-images/packageinstaller-icon_16.png" alt="icon" width="16" height="16" /></td><td><a href="applications/packageinstaller.html">PackageInstaller</a></td><td> </td>
|
||||
<td valign="top"><span style="color:silver">PKG形式のBeOSパッケージ用のインストーラーです。[<i>まだ用意されていません。</i>]</span></td></tr>
|
||||
<tr><td style="width:24px;"><img src="../images/apps-images/people-icon_16.png" alt="icon" width="16" height="16" /></td><td><a href="applications/people.html">People</a></td><td> </td>
|
||||
@@ -124,7 +124,7 @@
|
||||
<tr><td style="width:24px;"><img src="../images/apps-images/screenshot-icon_16.png" alt="icon" width="16" height="16" /></td><td><a href="applications/screenshot.html">Screenshot</a></td><td> </td>
|
||||
<td valign="top">スクリーンショットを取得するためのツールです。</td></tr>
|
||||
<tr><td style="width:24px;"><img src="../images/apps-images/showimage-icon_16.png" alt="icon" width="16" height="16" /></td><td><a href="applications/showimage.html">ShowImage</a></td><td> </td>
|
||||
<td valign="top">A simple image viewer.</td></tr>
|
||||
<td valign="top">シンプルな画像ビューアです。</td></tr>
|
||||
<tr><td style="width:24px;"><img src="../images/apps-images/soundrecorder-icon_16.png" alt="icon" width="16" height="16" /></td><td><a href="applications/soundrecorder.html">SoundRecorder</a></td><td> </td>
|
||||
<td valign="top"><span style="color:silver">ライン入力やマイクから音声を録音するためのツールです。[<i>まだ用意されていません。</i>]</span></td></tr>
|
||||
<tr><td style="width:24px;"><img src="../images/apps-images/stylededit-icon_16.png" alt="icon" width="16" height="16" /></td><td><a href="applications/stylededit.html">StyledEdit</a></td><td> </td>
|
||||
@@ -144,8 +144,8 @@
|
||||
<a id="cli-apps" name="cli-apps">Haikuに付属するコマンドライン・アプリケーション</a></h2>
|
||||
<p>Bashシェルに付属するコマンドライン・ツールおよびPOSIX準拠のために必要な標準的なコマンドライン・ツールに加えて、特筆すべきHaiku固有のコマンドライン・ツールが存在します。これらコマンドは多くの場合、スクリプト化を行う上で役立ちます。<a href="bash-scripting.html">Bashとスクリプト処理</a>のトピックもご覧ください。</p>
|
||||
<table summary="layout" border="0" cellpadding="2" cellspacing="0">
|
||||
<tr><td style="width:24px;"><img src="../images/apps-images/cli-app-icon_16.png" alt="icon" width="16" height="16" /></td><td><a href="applications/list-cli-apps.html">List of all commandline applications</a></td><td> </td></tr>
|
||||
<tr><td style="width:24px;"><img src="../images/apps-images/cli-app-icon_16.png" alt="icon" width="16" height="16" /></td><td><a href="applications/cli-apps.html">Haiku-specific commandline applications</a></td><td> </td></tr>
|
||||
<tr><td style="width:24px;"><img src="../images/apps-images/cli-app-icon_16.png" alt="icon" width="16" height="16" /></td><td><a href="applications/list-cli-apps.html">すべてのコマンドラインアプリケーション</a></td><td> </td></tr>
|
||||
<tr><td style="width:24px;"><img src="../images/apps-images/cli-app-icon_16.png" alt="icon" width="16" height="16" /></td><td><a href="applications/cli-apps.html">Haiku 特有のコマンドラインアプリケーション</a></td><td> </td></tr>
|
||||
</table>
|
||||
|
||||
<h2>
|
||||
@@ -172,8 +172,8 @@
|
||||
|
||||
<div class="nav">
|
||||
<div class="inner"><span>
|
||||
« <a href="workshop-filetypes+attributes.html">Workshop</a>
|
||||
:: <a href="contents.html" class="uplink">Contents</a>
|
||||
« <a href="workshop-filetypes+attributes.html">ワークショップ</a>
|
||||
:: <a href="contents.html" class="uplink">目次</a>
|
||||
:: <a href="desktop-applets.html">Desktop Applets</a> »
|
||||
</span></div>
|
||||
</div>
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -22,7 +22,7 @@
|
||||
<body>
|
||||
|
||||
<div id="banner">
|
||||
<div><span>User guide</span></div>
|
||||
<div><span>ユーザーガイド</span></div>
|
||||
</div>
|
||||
|
||||
<div class="nav">
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -22,7 +22,7 @@
|
||||
<body>
|
||||
|
||||
<div id="banner">
|
||||
<div><span>User guide</span></div>
|
||||
<div><span>ユーザーガイド</span></div>
|
||||
</div>
|
||||
|
||||
<div class="nav">
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -22,7 +22,7 @@
|
||||
<body>
|
||||
|
||||
<div id="banner">
|
||||
<div><span>User guide</span></div>
|
||||
<div><span>ユーザーガイド</span></div>
|
||||
</div>
|
||||
|
||||
<div class="nav">
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -22,7 +22,7 @@
|
||||
<body>
|
||||
|
||||
<div id="banner">
|
||||
<div><span>User guide</span></div>
|
||||
<div><span>ユーザーガイド</span></div>
|
||||
</div>
|
||||
|
||||
<div class="nav">
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -11,6 +11,7 @@
|
||||
* Humdinger <humdingerb@gmail.com>
|
||||
* Translators:
|
||||
* log-1
|
||||
* mt
|
||||
*
|
||||
-->
|
||||
<meta http-equiv="content-type" content="text/html; charset=utf-8" />
|
||||
@@ -22,7 +23,7 @@
|
||||
<body>
|
||||
|
||||
<div id="banner">
|
||||
<div><span>User guide</span></div>
|
||||
<div><span>ユーザーガイド</span></div>
|
||||
</div>
|
||||
|
||||
<div class="nav">
|
||||
@@ -49,9 +50,8 @@
|
||||
|
||||
<div id="content">
|
||||
<div>
|
||||
<div class="box-info">The translation of this page isn't yet complete. Until it is, unfinished parts use the English original.</div>
|
||||
|
||||
<h2><img src="../../images/apps-images/cli-app-icon_64.png" alt="cli-app-icon_64.png" width="64" height="64" />Haiku-specific commandline applications</h2>
|
||||
<h2><img src="../../images/apps-images/cli-app-icon_64.png" alt="cli-app-icon_64.png" width="64" height="64" />Haiku特有のコマンドライン・アプリケーション</h2>
|
||||
<table summary="layout" border="0" cellspacing="0" cellpadding="2">
|
||||
<tr><td>場所:</td><td style="width:15px;"></td><td><span class="path">/boot/system/bin</span><br /><span class="path">/boot/common/bin</span><br /><span class="path">~/config/bin</span></td></tr>
|
||||
</table>
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -22,7 +22,7 @@
|
||||
<body>
|
||||
|
||||
<div id="banner">
|
||||
<div><span>User guide</span></div>
|
||||
<div><span>ユーザーガイド</span></div>
|
||||
</div>
|
||||
|
||||
<div class="nav">
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -20,7 +20,7 @@
|
||||
<body>
|
||||
|
||||
<div id="banner">
|
||||
<div><span>User guide</span></div>
|
||||
<div><span>ユーザーガイド</span></div>
|
||||
</div>
|
||||
|
||||
<div class="nav">
|
||||
@@ -47,7 +47,7 @@
|
||||
|
||||
<div id="content">
|
||||
<div>
|
||||
<div class="box-info">The translation of this page isn't yet complete. Until it is, unfinished parts use the English original.</div>
|
||||
<div class="box-info">このページの翻訳はまだ完全ではありません。完成するまでは、未完成の部分はオリジナルの英文を使用します。</div>
|
||||
|
||||
<h2><img src="../../images/apps-images/deskcalc-icon_64.png" alt="deskcalc-icon_64.png" width="64" height="64" />DeskCalc</h2>
|
||||
<table summary="layout" border="0" cellspacing="0" cellpadding="2">
|
||||
@@ -69,14 +69,14 @@ Also, be aware that <tt>.</tt> and <tt>,</tt> are both considered floating point
|
||||
<li><p>Right-clicking offers these options:</p>
|
||||
<table summary="layout" border="0" cellspacing="0" cellpadding="2">
|
||||
<tr><td><span class="menu">Enable Num Lock on start up</span></td><td style="width:15px;"></td><td>automatically activates the number block when launching DeskCalc</td></tr>
|
||||
<tr><td><span class="menu">Show Keypad</span></td><td></td><td>hides the keypad when deactivated</td></tr>
|
||||
<tr><td><span class="menu">Show keypad</span></td><td></td><td>hides the keypad when deactivated</td></tr>
|
||||
</table></li>
|
||||
<li><p>You can resize the calculator until it fits your needs and then put it as <a href="../gui.html#replicants">Replicant</a> onto the Desktop via drag&drop of the symbol in the bottom right corner. Make sure <span class="menu">Show Replicants</span> is activated in the Deskbar.</p></li>
|
||||
<li><p>You can resize the calculator until it fits your needs and then put it as <a href="../gui.html#replicants">Replicant</a> onto the Desktop via drag&drop of the symbol in the bottom right corner. Make sure <span class="menu">Show replicants</span> is activated in the Deskbar.</p></li>
|
||||
<li><p>The keypad can be colored with a drag&drop from any color well, e.g. from <span class="app">Icon-O-Matic</span>.</p></li>
|
||||
<li><p>You can move up and down in a history of past calculations with <span class="key">↑</span> and <span class="key">↓</span>.</p></li>
|
||||
<li><p>You can select DeskCalc's contents and drag&drop it into any application. Or you drop it into a Tracker window or onto the Desktop and a text file with that clipping is created there.</p>
|
||||
<p>Even better, the reverse is also possible:<br />
|
||||
Create clippings as described at various stages of your calculation and go back to them by drag&dropping them back into DeskCalc.<br />
|
||||
Create clippings as described at various stages of your calculation and go back to them by drag & dropping them back into DeskCalc.<br />
|
||||
Or you drag&drop a calculation directly out of an email onto DeskCalc.</p></li>
|
||||
<li><p>DeskCalc can be used in Terminal. Just put the expression in double quotes, like this:</p>
|
||||
<pre class="terminal">~> DeskCalc "sin(45)*(cos(12)+3.45)"
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -20,7 +20,7 @@
|
||||
<body>
|
||||
|
||||
<div id="banner">
|
||||
<div><span>User guide</span></div>
|
||||
<div><span>ユーザーガイド</span></div>
|
||||
</div>
|
||||
|
||||
<div class="nav">
|
||||
@@ -47,7 +47,7 @@
|
||||
|
||||
<div id="content">
|
||||
<div>
|
||||
<div class="box-info">The translation of this page isn't yet complete. Until it is, unfinished parts use the English original.</div>
|
||||
<div class="box-info">このページの翻訳はまだ完全ではありません。完成するまでは、未完成の部分はオリジナルの英文を使用します。</div>
|
||||
|
||||
<h2><img src="../../images/apps-images/diskprobe-icon_64.png" alt="diskprobe-icon_64.png" width="64" height="64" />DiskProbe</h2>
|
||||
<table summary="layout" border="0" cellspacing="0" cellpadding="2">
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -20,7 +20,7 @@
|
||||
<body>
|
||||
|
||||
<div id="banner">
|
||||
<div><span>User guide</span></div>
|
||||
<div><span>ユーザーガイド</span></div>
|
||||
</div>
|
||||
|
||||
<div class="nav">
|
||||
@@ -47,7 +47,7 @@
|
||||
|
||||
<div id="content">
|
||||
<div>
|
||||
<div class="box-info">The translation of this page isn't yet complete. Until it is, unfinished parts use the English original.</div>
|
||||
<div class="box-info">このページの翻訳はまだ完全ではありません。完成するまでは、未完成の部分はオリジナルの英文を使用します。</div>
|
||||
|
||||
<h2><img src="../../images/apps-images/diskusage-icon_64.png" alt="diskusage-icon_64.png" width="64" height="64" />DiskUsage</h2>
|
||||
<table summary="layout" border="0" cellspacing="0" cellpadding="2">
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -20,7 +20,7 @@
|
||||
<body>
|
||||
|
||||
<div id="banner">
|
||||
<div><span>User guide</span></div>
|
||||
<div><span>ユーザーガイド</span></div>
|
||||
</div>
|
||||
|
||||
<div class="nav">
|
||||
@@ -47,7 +47,7 @@
|
||||
|
||||
<div id="content">
|
||||
<div>
|
||||
<div class="box-info">The translation of this page isn't yet complete. Until it is, unfinished parts use the English original.</div>
|
||||
<div class="box-info">このページの翻訳はまだ完全ではありません。完成するまでは、未完成の部分はオリジナルの英文を使用します。</div>
|
||||
|
||||
<h2><img src="../../images/apps-images/drivesetup-icon_64.png" alt="drivesetup-icon_64.png" width="64" height="64" />DriveSetup</h2>
|
||||
<table summary="layout" border="0" cellspacing="0" cellpadding="2">
|
||||
@@ -70,7 +70,7 @@ Which brings us to this:</p>
|
||||
<p>When you found unformatted space on a drive, like the above <tt><empty></tt>, you can create a new partition in this space with <span class="menu">Partition | Create...</span>(<span class="key">ALT</span> <span class="key">C</span>).</p>
|
||||
<img src="../images/apps-images/drivesetup-create.png" alt="drivesetup-create.png" />
|
||||
<p>You're prompted with this dialog that lets you adjust the partition size and type. Choose <span class="menu">Be File System</span> if you want to use the partition for an Haiku installation or if you want to use all the interesting Haiku features with it, like attributes and queries. Note, that other operating systems might not be able to access such a partition.</p>
|
||||
<p>If you have created a primary partition instead of just another extended/logical partition within one, the above dialog also displays an <span class="menu">Active Partition</span> checkbox. You'll have to check that, if you'll use that partition to boot a Haiku installation.</p>
|
||||
<p>If you have created a primary partition instead of just another extended/logical partition within one, the above dialog also displays an <span class="menu">Active partition</span> checkbox. You'll have to check that, if you'll use that partition to boot a Haiku installation.</p>
|
||||
<p>Before you can use, or even mount the newly created partition, it has to be initialized with a filesystem.</p>
|
||||
<h2>
|
||||
<a href="#"><img src="../../images/up.png" style="border:none;float:right" alt="index" /></a>
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -20,7 +20,7 @@
|
||||
<body>
|
||||
|
||||
<div id="banner">
|
||||
<div><span>User guide</span></div>
|
||||
<div><span>ユーザーガイド</span></div>
|
||||
</div>
|
||||
|
||||
<div class="nav">
|
||||
@@ -47,7 +47,7 @@
|
||||
|
||||
<div id="content">
|
||||
<div>
|
||||
<div class="box-info">The translation of this page isn't yet complete. Until it is, unfinished parts use the English original.</div>
|
||||
<div class="box-info">このページの翻訳はまだ完全ではありません。完成するまでは、未完成の部分はオリジナルの英文を使用します。</div>
|
||||
|
||||
<h2><img src="../../images/apps-images/expander-icon_64.png" alt="expander-icon_64.png" width="64" height="64" />Expander</h2>
|
||||
<table summary="layout" border="0" cellspacing="0" cellpadding="2">
|
||||
@@ -64,7 +64,7 @@ Just double-click an archive to see this simple interface:</p>
|
||||
<tr><td><span class="button">Destination</span></td><td><span class="key">ALT</span> <span class="key">D</span></td><td>will open a file dialog to set the destination.</td></tr>
|
||||
<tr><td><span class="button">Expand</span></td><td><span class="key">ALT</span> <span class="key">E</span></td><td>will start the unpacking. It can be aborted with <span class="key">ALT</span> <span class="key">K</span>.</td></tr>
|
||||
</table>
|
||||
<p>You can toggle the display of the file listing by un/checking <i>Show Contents</i> or pressing <span class="key">ALT</span> <span class="key">L</span>.</p>
|
||||
<p>You can toggle the display of the file listing by un/checking <i>Show contents</i> or pressing <span class="key">ALT</span> <span class="key">L</span>.</p>
|
||||
<div class="box-info">Expander can only unpack whole archives.<br />
|
||||
You can't select individual files to expand or add/remove files from the archive.</div>
|
||||
<p><span class="menu">Edit | Preferences...</span> or <span class="key">ALT</span> <span class="key">P</span> opens a preference panel that offers some useful settings to adjust Expander's behavior.<br />
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -20,7 +20,7 @@
|
||||
<body>
|
||||
|
||||
<div id="banner">
|
||||
<div><span>User guide</span></div>
|
||||
<div><span>ユーザーガイド</span></div>
|
||||
</div>
|
||||
|
||||
<div class="nav">
|
||||
@@ -47,7 +47,7 @@
|
||||
|
||||
<div id="content">
|
||||
<div>
|
||||
<div class="box-info">The translation of this page isn't yet complete. Until it is, unfinished parts use the English original.</div>
|
||||
<div class="box-info">このページの翻訳はまだ完全ではありません。完成するまでは、未完成の部分はオリジナルの英文を使用します。</div>
|
||||
|
||||
<table class="index" id="index" summary="index">
|
||||
<tr class="heading"><td>目次</td></tr>
|
||||
@@ -104,7 +104,7 @@ Take this icon of the Terminal, for example:</p>
|
||||
<h2>
|
||||
<a href="#"><img src="../../images/up.png" style="border:none;float:right" alt="index" /></a>
|
||||
<a id="icons-attributes" name="icons-attributes">Icons are attributes</a></h2>
|
||||
<p>Icons are stored as an attribute with their file. However, that doesn't mean that every file has to have this attribute to appear with an icon in a Tracker window: data files inherit their icon from their filetype. To globally change the filetype's icon you use the <span class="app">FileTypes</span> preferences. If you only want to add a special icon to an individual file, you use the <span class="app">FileType Add-On</span> on it instead. See topic <a href="../filetypes.html">Filetypes</a> for more information.</p>
|
||||
<p>Icons are stored as an attribute with their file. However, that doesn't mean that every file has to have this attribute to appear with an icon in a Tracker window: data files inherit their icon from their filetype. To globally change the filetype's icon you use the <span class="app">FileTypes</span> preferences. If you only want to add a special icon to an individual file, you use the <span class="app">FileType add-on</span> on it instead. See topic <a href="../filetypes.html">Filetypes</a> for more information.</p>
|
||||
<div class="box-info">Being an attribute, it follows that only filesystems supporting metadata can retain a file's individual icon. So, if you move files off your BFS volume, consider zipping them up so you don't lose icons or other attributes.</div>
|
||||
|
||||
<h2>
|
||||
@@ -165,13 +165,13 @@ Selected points are deleted by pressing <span class="key">DEL</span> or by click
|
||||
</table>
|
||||
|
||||
<h4><a id="i-o-m-path-menu" name="i-o-m-path-menu">Path Menu</a></h4>
|
||||
<p>The <span class="menu">Path</span> menu offers a few obvious entries to <span class="menu">Add Rectangle</span> and <span class="menu">Add Circle</span> or to <span class="menu">Duplicate</span> or <span class="menu">Remove</span> a path. Here are some that may need a bit more explaining:</p>
|
||||
<p>The <span class="menu">Path</span> menu offers a few obvious entries to <span class="menu">Add rectangle</span> and <span class="menu">Add circle</span> or to <span class="menu">Duplicate</span> or <span class="menu">Remove</span> a path. Here are some that may need a bit more explaining:</p>
|
||||
|
||||
<table summary="Path menu" border="0" cellspacing="0" cellpadding="2">
|
||||
<tr><td><span class="menu">Reverse</span></td><td style="width:15px;"></td><td>If your path isn't "closed" (see Path Properties below), a click into the canvas always creates a new point, connecting it with the last one. "Reverse" will reverse this order and your new point will connect to original start point instead.</td></tr>
|
||||
<tr><td><span class="menu">Clean Up</span></td><td></td><td>Most useful with imported SVGs, this function will remove redundant points.</td></tr>
|
||||
<tr><td class="onelinetop"><span class="menu">Rotate Indices Right</span></td><td><span class="key">ALT</span> <span class="key">R</span></td><td>Practically, this rotates the opening of a path. It's best seen when using a not-closed path with a style and a shape with a stroke transformer. Now, if your path looks like a ⊂ it will rotate like this: ⊂ ∩ ⊃ ∪.</td></tr>
|
||||
<tr><td class="onelinetop"><span class="menu">Rotate Indices Left</span></td><td><span class="key">ALT</span> <span class="key">SHIFT</span> <span class="key">R</span></td><td>Does the same in the other direction.</td></tr>
|
||||
<tr><td><span class="menu">Clean up</span></td><td></td><td>Most useful with imported SVGs, this function will remove redundant points.</td></tr>
|
||||
<tr><td class="onelinetop"><span class="menu">Rotate indices right</span></td><td><span class="key">ALT</span> <span class="key">R</span></td><td>Practically, this rotates the opening of a path. It's best seen when using a not-closed path with a style and a shape with a stroke transformer. Now, if your path looks like a ⊂ it will rotate like this: ⊂ ∩ ⊃ ∪.</td></tr>
|
||||
<tr><td class="onelinetop"><span class="menu">Rotate indices left</span></td><td><span class="key">ALT</span> <span class="key">SHIFT</span> <span class="key">R</span></td><td>Does the same in the other direction.</td></tr>
|
||||
</table>
|
||||
|
||||
<h4><a id="i-o-m-path-properties" name="i-o-m-path-properties">Path Properties</a></h4>
|
||||
@@ -205,11 +205,11 @@ Selected points are deleted by pressing <span class="key">DEL</span> or by click
|
||||
<p>Shapes lie on top of each other, each is on its own layer, if you will. To reorder them you drag&drop their entry to a different position in the list.</p>
|
||||
|
||||
<h4><a id="i-o-m-shape-menu" name="i-o-m-path-menu">Shape Menu</a></h4>
|
||||
<p>The <span class="menu">Shape</span> menu offers the before mentioned possibility to <span class="menu">Add Empty, With Path/Style/Path&Style</span> and to <span class="menu">Duplicate</span> or <span class="menu">Remove</span> a shape. Then, there is:</p>
|
||||
<p>The <span class="menu">Shape</span> menu offers the before mentioned possibility to <span class="menu">Add empty, with path/style/path & style</span> and to <span class="menu">Duplicate</span> or <span class="menu">Remove</span> a shape. Then, there is:</p>
|
||||
<table summary="Shape menu" border="0" cellspacing="0" cellpadding="2">
|
||||
<tr><td><span class="menu">Reset Transformation</span></td><td style="width:15px;"></td><td>Reverts all the move, resize and rotate transformations you have applied to the shape.</td></tr>
|
||||
<tr><td class="onelinetop"><span class="menu">Freeze Transformation</span></td><td></td><td>When you transform a shape, its assigned path(s) stay in their original position. This may be intended; maybe more than one shape is using that path, maybe you intentionally used <span class="menu">Options | Snap to Grid</span> to set the points at precise pixel borders.<br />
|
||||
If not, "Freeze Transformation" will apply the current shape transformation to the assigned path(s). A future "Reset Transformation" will then return to this new state.</td></tr>
|
||||
<tr><td><span class="menu">Reset transformation</span></td><td style="width:15px;"></td><td>Reverts all the move, resize and rotate transformations you have applied to the shape.</td></tr>
|
||||
<tr><td class="onelinetop"><span class="menu">Freeze transformation</span></td><td></td><td>When you transform a shape, its assigned path(s) stay in their original position. This may be intended; maybe more than one shape is using that path, maybe you intentionally used <span class="menu">Options | Snap to grid</span> to set the points at precise pixel borders.<br />
|
||||
If not, "Freeze transformation" will apply the current shape transformation to the assigned path(s). A future "Reset Transformation" will then return to this new state.</td></tr>
|
||||
</table>
|
||||
|
||||
<h4><a id="i-o-m-shape-properties" name="i-o-m-shape-properties">Shape Properties</a></h4>
|
||||
@@ -257,7 +257,7 @@ Of course you can move these indicators to change the gradient to your liking. Y
|
||||
<p>You can move, resize and rotate the representing box of a gradient on the canvas until it fits your needs. This works just like with shapes.</p>
|
||||
|
||||
<h4><a id="i-o-m-style-menu" name="i-o-m-style-menu">Style Menu</a></h4>
|
||||
<p>The <span class="menu">Style</span> menu offers the usual entries to <span class="menu">Add</span>, <span class="menu">Duplicate</span> or <span class="menu">Remove</span> a style and to <span class="menu">Reset Transformation</span>.</p>
|
||||
<p>The <span class="menu">Style</span> menu offers the usual entries to <span class="menu">Add</span>, <span class="menu">Duplicate</span> or <span class="menu">Remove</span> a style and to <span class="menu">Reset transformation</span>.</p>
|
||||
|
||||
<h4><a id="i-o-m-style-properties" name="i-o-m-style-properties">Style Properties</a></h4>
|
||||
<p>The <span class="menu">Name</span> is the only <span class="menu">Properties</span> of a style.</p>
|
||||
@@ -280,9 +280,9 @@ Of course you can move these indicators to change the gradient to your liking. Y
|
||||
<p>Besides a <span class="menu">Name</span> and the actual <span class="menu">Width</span> for the transformer, the <span class="menu">Properties</span> view has these (depending on its type slightly differing) options:</p>
|
||||
<table summary="Transformer properties" border="0" cellspacing="0" cellpadding="2">
|
||||
<tr><td><span class="menu">Caps</span></td><td style="width:15px;"></td><td><i>Stroke only</i>. Defines the end caps of a line: <span class="menu">Butt</span>, <span class="menu">Square</span> or <span class="menu">Round</span>.</td></tr>
|
||||
<tr><td><span class="menu">Detect Orient.</span></td><td></td><td><i>Contour only</i>. Determines if the contour is to the inside or outside the path.</td></tr>
|
||||
<tr><td><span class="menu">Detect orient.</span></td><td></td><td><i>Contour only</i>. Determines if the contour is to the inside or outside the path.</td></tr>
|
||||
<tr><td><span class="menu">Joins</span></td><td></td><td>Defines how lines are joint at a point: <span class="menu">Miter</span>, <span class="menu">Round</span> or <span class="menu">Bevel</span>.</td></tr>
|
||||
<tr><td><span class="menu">Miter Limit</span></td><td></td><td>Only when the above <span class="menu">Joins</span> is set to "Miter" this setting influences the looks of the miter joint. </td></tr>
|
||||
<tr><td><span class="menu">Miter limit</span></td><td></td><td>Only when the above <span class="menu">Joins</span> is set to "Miter" this setting influences the looks of the miter joint. </td></tr>
|
||||
</table>
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -290,18 +290,18 @@ Of course you can move these indicators to change the gradient to your liking. Y
|
||||
<a href="#"><img src="../../images/up.png" style="border:none;float:right" alt="index" /></a>
|
||||
<a id="i-o-m-save" name="i-o-m-save">Saving an icon</a></h3>
|
||||
<p>There's your usual menu bar at the top, <span class="menu">File</span>, <span class="menu">Edit</span>, <span class="menu">Options</span>. The usage is pretty much self-explaining, so we'll only look at how to save your work.</p>
|
||||
<p><span class="menu">File | Save As...</span> will save in a special Icon-O-Matic format that retains additional information like the names of paths, shapes and styles. These will be stripped from the actual icon once you export it to save space. It's a good idea to back-up your work like this, because without named objects everything's named "<path>/<shape>/<style>" which makes specific changes tedious.</p>
|
||||
<p><span class="menu">File | Save as...</span> will save in a special Icon-O-Matic format that retains additional information like the names of paths, shapes and styles. These will be stripped from the actual icon once you export it to save space. It's a good idea to back-up your work like this, because without named objects everything's named "<path>/<shape>/<style>" which makes specific changes tedious.</p>
|
||||
|
||||
<p><span class="menu">File | Export As...</span> opens a familiar save panel with a file format pop-up menu at the bottom, offering these choices:</p>
|
||||
<p><span class="menu">File | Export as...</span> opens a familiar save panel with a file format pop-up menu at the bottom, offering these choices:</p>
|
||||
<table summary="file formats" border="0" cellspacing="0" cellpadding="2">
|
||||
<tr><td>HVIF</td><td style="width:15px;"></td><td>Haiku Vector Icon Format</td></tr>
|
||||
<tr><td>HVIF RDef</td><td></td><td>Saves as resource used by programmers</td></tr>
|
||||
<tr><td>HVIF Source Code</td><td></td><td>Saves as source code used by programmers</td></tr>
|
||||
<tr><td>HVIF source code</td><td></td><td>Saves as source code used by programmers</td></tr>
|
||||
<tr><td>SVG</td><td></td><td>Saves as SVG</td></tr>
|
||||
<tr><td>PNG</td><td></td><td>Saves as a 64px sized PNG</td></tr>
|
||||
<tr><td>PNG Set</td><td></td><td>Saves as 16, 32 and 64px sized PNGs</td></tr>
|
||||
<tr><td>BEOS:ICON Attribute</td><td></td><td>Choose a file and set its icon attribute directly</td></tr>
|
||||
<tr><td>META:ICON Attribute</td><td></td><td>Choose a file and attach the icon as mere meta data</td></tr>
|
||||
<tr><td>PNG set</td><td></td><td>Saves as 16, 32 and 64px sized PNGs</td></tr>
|
||||
<tr><td>BEOS:ICON attribute</td><td></td><td>Choose a file and set its icon attribute directly</td></tr>
|
||||
<tr><td>META:ICON attribute</td><td></td><td>Choose a file and attach the icon as mere meta data</td></tr>
|
||||
</table>
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -20,7 +20,7 @@
|
||||
<body>
|
||||
|
||||
<div id="banner">
|
||||
<div><span>User guide</span></div>
|
||||
<div><span>ユーザーガイド</span></div>
|
||||
</div>
|
||||
|
||||
<div class="nav">
|
||||
@@ -47,7 +47,7 @@
|
||||
|
||||
<div id="content">
|
||||
<div>
|
||||
<div class="box-info">The translation of this page isn't yet complete. Until it is, unfinished parts use the English original.</div>
|
||||
<div class="box-info">このページの翻訳はまだ完全ではありません。完成するまでは、未完成の部分はオリジナルの英文を使用します。</div>
|
||||
|
||||
<h2><img src="../../images/apps-images/installer-icon_64.png" alt="installer-icon_64.png" width="64" height="64" />Installer</h2>
|
||||
<table summary="layout" border="0" cellspacing="0" cellpadding="2">
|
||||
@@ -72,7 +72,7 @@ chainloader +1</pre></li>
|
||||
<img src="../images/apps-images/installer.png" alt="installer.png" />
|
||||
<p>In the first pop-up menu you choose the source for the installation. It can be a currently installed Haiku or can come from an install CD or USB drive, etc.<br />
|
||||
The second pop-up menu specifies the target for the installation. This target partition/volume will be completely overwritten and has to be set aside beforehand by a partitioning tool like GParted.</p>
|
||||
<p>Clicking the little expander widget will <i>Show Optional Packages</i>, if available, that you can choose to install in addition to the basic Haiku.</p>
|
||||
<p>Clicking the little expander widget will <i>Show optional packages</i>, if available, that you can choose to install in addition to the basic Haiku.</p>
|
||||
<p>You should do a last check if you really picked the right target before starting the installation process. Click on <span class="button">Setup partitions...</span> to open <a href="drivesetup.html">DriveSetup</a> and have a look at the naming and layout of the available volumes and partitions.</p>
|
||||
<p><span class="button">Begin</span> starts the installation procedure, which basically copies everything but the <span class="path">home/</span> and <span class="path">common/</span> folder onto the target volume and makes it bootable.</p>
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||